Contents
Introduction ..................................... 2
AV Controller
Connection .................................... 19
Turning On & First Time Setup..... 43
PR-SC885
Instruction Manual
Basic Operation
Playing your AV components....... 57
Listening to the Radio.................. 58
Enjoying the Listening Modes ..... 79
Thank you for purchasing an Onkyo AV controller.
Please read this manual thoroughly before making
connections and plugging in the unit.
Following the instructions in this manual will enable
you to obtain optimum performance and listening
enjoyment from your new AV controller.
Advanced Operation..................... 94
Troubleshooting.......................... 121
Please retain this manual for future reference.
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Precautions
1. Recording Copyright—Unless it’s for personal use
only, recording copyrighted material is illegal with-
out the permission of the copyright holder.
For U.S. models
FCC Information for User
CAUTION:
2. AC Fuse—The AC fuse inside the unit is not user-
serviceable. If you cannot turn on the unit, contact
the dealer from whom you purchased this unit.
The user changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
3. Care—Occasionally you should dust the unit all
over with a soft cloth. For stubborn stains, use a soft
cloth dampened with a weak solution of mild deter-
gent and water. Dry the unit immediately afterwards
with a clean cloth. Don’t use abrasive cloths, thin-
ners, alcohol, or other chemical solvents, because
they may damage the finish or remove the panel let-
tering.
NOTE:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply
with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to
Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful interfer-
ence in a residential installation.
This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accor-
dance with the instructions, may cause harmful interfer-
ence to radio communications. However, there is no
guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular
installation. If this equipment does cause harmful inter-
ference to radio or television reception, which can be
determined by turning the equipment off and on, the
user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by
one or more of the following measures:
4. Power
WARNING
BEFORE PLUGGING IN THE UNIT FOR THE
FIRST TIME, READ THE FOLLOWING SEC-
TION CAREFULLY.
AC outlet voltages vary from country to country.
Make sure that the voltage in your area meets the
voltage requirements printed on the unit’s rear panel
(e.g., AC 230 V, 50 Hz or AC 120 V, 60 Hz).
The power cord plug is used to disconnect this unit
from the AC power source. Make sure that the plug
is readily operable (easily accessible) at all times.
•
•
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase the separation between the equipment and
receiver.
•
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit dif-
ferent from that to which the receiver is connected.
For North American model
Pressing the [STANDBY/ON] button to select
Standby mode does not fully shutdown the unit. If
you do not intend to use the unit for an extended
period, remove the power cord from the AC outlet.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV techni-
cian for help.
5. Never Touch this Unit with Wet Hands—Never
handle this unit or its power cord while your hands
are wet or damp. If water or any other liquid gets
inside this unit, have it checked by the dealer from
whom you purchased this unit.
For Canadian Models
NOTE: THIS CLASS B DIGITAL APPARATUS
COMPLIES WITH CANADIAN ICES-003.
For models having a power cord with a polarized plug:
CAUTION: TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK,
MATCH WIDE BLADE OF PLUG TO WIDE SLOT,
FULLY INSERT.
6. Handling Notes
• If you need to transport this unit, use the original
packaging to pack it how it was when you origi-
nally bought it.
• Do not leave rubber or plastic items on this unit
for a long time, because they may leave marks on
the case.
• This unit’s top and rear panels may get warm
after prolonged use. This is normal.
• If you do not use this unit for a long time, it may
not work properly the next time you turn it on, so
be sure to use it occasionally.
Modèle canadien
REMARQUE: CET APPAREIL NUMÉRIQUE DE
LA CLASSE B EST CONFORME À LA NORME
NMB-003 DU CANADA.
Sur les modèles dont la fiche est polarisée:
ATTENTION: POUR ÉVITER LES CHOCS ÉLEC-
TRIQUES, INTRODUIRE LA LAME LA PLUS
LARGE DE LA FICHE DANS LA BORNE CORRE-
SPONDANTE DE LA PRISE ET POUSSER
JUSQU’AU FOND.
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Features
Processing
Others
*1
*11
• THX Surround EX
• Audyssey MultEQ XT room correction
• Easy-to-use onscreen setup menus
• IR IN A/B and OUT
*1
• THX Ultra2 certified
*2
• Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital EX, Dolby Digital
Plus, Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Pro Logic IIx
• 12V TRIGGER OUT A, B, C
*3
• DTS , DTS-ES Discrete, DTS-ES Matrix, DTS-HD
• Preprogrammed remote controller for use with other
AV components, with Learning and Macro functions
MasterAudio, DTS-HD High Resolution, DTS 96/24,
DTS Neo:6
*4
• Neural Surround , THX-Neural
*1
*5
• Theater-Dimensional virtual surround sound
• DSD Direct
• 192 kHz/24-bit D/A converters
• Powerful and highly accurate 32-bit DSP processing
THX and Ultra2 are trademarks of THX Ltd. THX may be reg-
istered in some jurisdictions. All rights reserved. Surround EX
is a trademark of Dolby Laboratories. Used with permission.
*6
• Re-EQ function
*2
• Tone control on all channels (7.1)
• 15-band EQ on 7 channels, 5-band EQ on subwoofer
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
“Dolby”, “Pro Logic” and the double-D symbol are trademarks
of Dolby Laboratories.
Audio/Video
• Balanced XLR stereo input
*3
• Balanced XLR 7.1-channel preouts, with front bi-
amping capability
“DTS” is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc., and “DTS-HD
Master Audio” is a trademark of DTS, Inc.
• Zone 2 with level, tone, balance, and left, right, and
subwoofer pre outs, and composite video output, and
component video output (assignable).
*4
• Zone 3 with level, balance, and left, right, and sub-
woofer pre outs
Neural Surround is a trademark owned by Neural Audio Cor-
poration, THX is a trademark of THX Ltd., which may be reg-
istered in some jurisdictions. All rights reserved.
*7
• 4 HDMI inputs, 2 outputs (Version 1.3a)
• HDMI upconversion of composite video, S-Video,
and component sources (720p, 1080i, 1080p capable)
*5
• Component video upconversion of composite video
and S-Video sources
Theater-Dimensional is a trademark of Onkyo Corporation.
*6 Re-Equalization and the “Re-EQ” logo are trademarks of THX
Ltd.
• Composite video to S-Video and S-Video to compos-
ite video conversion
*7
• 6 digital inputs (3 optical, 3 coaxial), 1 output (optical)
• 3 component video inputs, 2 outputs
• 6 S-Video inputs, 2 outputs
HDMI, the HDMI logo and High Definition Multimedia Inter-
face are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licens-
ing, LLC.
• RS-232 control
*8
• Color-coded, assignable 7.1 multichannel input
• 7.1-channel pre out (RCA)
XM Ready® is a trademark of XM Satellite Radio Inc. ©2005
XM Satellite Radio Inc. All rights reserved.
Tuner
*9
*8
• XM Satellite Radio ready
©2005 SIRIUS Satellite Radio Inc. “SIRIUS,” SiriusConnect,
the SIRIUS dog logo, channel names and logos are trademarks
of SIRIUS Satellite Radio Inc.Available only in the contiguous
United States (excluding Alaska and Hawaii) and Canada.
* XM Mini-Tuner and Home Dock required; sold separately.
*9
• SIRIUS Satellite Radio ready
* SiriusConnect Home tuner kit required; sold separately.
*10
• HD Radio reception
• 40 AM/FM/SIRIUS/XM presets
• AM/FM auto tuning
• Direct tuning
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Supplied Accessories
Features—Continued
Make sure you have the following accessories:
*10
HD Radio™ Technology Manufactured Under License From
iBiquity Digital Corporation. “iBiquity Digital” and the “HD
Radio” and “HD” Symbols are registered trademarks of iBiq-
uity Digital Corporation. “HD Radio” is a trademark of iBiq-
uity Digital Corporation. U.S. and Foreign Patents.
*11
Remote controller and three batteries (AA/R6)
Manufactured under license fromAudyssey Laboratories. U.S.
and foreign patents pending. Audyssey MultEQ XT is a trade-
mark of Audyssey Laboratories.
Speaker setup microphone
Indoor FM antenna
THX Ultra2
Before any home theater component can be THX
Ultra2 certified, it must pass a rigorous series of
quality and performance tests. Only then can a prod-
uct feature the THX Ultra2 logo, which is your guar-
antee that the Home Theater products you purchase
will give you superb performance for many years to
come. THX Ultra2 requirements define hundreds of
parameters, including power amplifier performance,
and pre-amplifier performance and operation for
both digital and analog domains. THX Ultra2 receiv-
ers also feature proprietary THX technologies (e.g.,
THX Mode) which accurately translate movie
soundtracks for home theater playback.
AM loop antenna
*
*
*
“Xantech” is a registered trademark of Xantech Corporation.
“Niles” is a registered trademark of Niles Audio Corporation.
Apple and iPod are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc., regis-
tered in the U.S. and other countries.
Power cord
(Power cord varies from country to country.)
This product incorporates copyright protection tech-
nology that is protected by U.S. patents and other
intellectual property rights. Use of this copyright
protection technology must be authorized by Macro-
vision Corporation, and is intended for home and
other limited consumer uses only unless otherwise
authorized by Macrovision. Reverse engineering or
disassembly is prohibited.
*
In catalogs and on packaging, the letter at the end of the product
name indicates the color. Specifications and operation are the same
regardless of color.
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Multiroom Capability
You can use three speaker systems with this AV controller—a surround-sound speaker system (up to 7.1 channels)
in your main listening room, a stereo speaker system in a second room, or Zone 2, as we call it, and another stereo
speaker system in a third room that we call Zone 3. And, you can select a different audio source for each room.
Main Room: In your main listening room, you can enjoy up to 7.1-channel playback (see pages 19–23).
You can enjoy the various listening modes such as Dolby, DTS, and THX (pages 79–86).
Zone 2: In your Zone 2 room, you can enjoy 2-channel stereo playback and video playback (see page 109).
*The listening modes cannot be used with Zone 2 and Zone 3.
*External power amplifier required.
Zone 3: In your Zone 3 room, you can enjoy 2-channel stereo playback (see page 110).
*The listening modes cannot be used with Zone 2 and Zone 3.
*External power amplifier required.
Main Room
Surround back left and right
speakers
Front left and right speakers
Subwoofer
Center speaker
Surround left and right speakers
Zone 2 Room
Zone 3 Room
Left and right
stereo speakers
Left and right
stereo speakers
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Listening to the Radio ....................................58
Using the Remote Controller .....................................13
RECEIVER/TAPE Mode ...........................................14
Connecting an Outdoor FM Antenna .........................25
Controller ................................................................27
Set-top box or Other Video Source .........................34
Recorder ..................................................................40
Advanced Setup ..............................................94
HDMI Input Setup .....................................................47
Component Video Input Setup ...................................48
Changing the Input Display .......................................49
Digital Input Setup .....................................................49
Analog Input Setup ....................................................51
Automatic Speaker Setup (Audyssey MultEQ XT) ...52
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting to Know the AV Controller
Front Panel
1 2 3 4 5
6
7 8
MASTER VOLUME
STANDBY/ON
STANDBY
ZONE
ZONE
2
3
PURE AUDIO
AUDIO SEL
DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
GAME/TV
AUX
1
AUX
2
TAPE
TUNER
CD
PHONO
DISPLAY
PUSH TO OPEN
Push here to open
the flap
Front flap
9
J
K
For detailed information, see the pages in parentheses.
A STANDBY/ON button (43)
Selects the Pure Audio listening mode. The indica-
tor lights up when this mode is selected. Pressing
this button again selects the previous listening
mode.
Sets the AV controller to On or Standby.
B STANDBY indicator (43)
Lights up when the AV controller is on Standby and
flashes while a signal is being received from the
remote controller.
J AUDIO SEL button (78)
Selects the audio input: analog, digital, HDMI, or
multichannel.
C ZONE 2 indicator (111)
Flashes when Zone 2 is being set. Lights up when
Zone 2 is on.
K Input selector buttons (57)
Select the following input sources: DVD,
VCR/DVR, CBL/SAT, GAME/TV, AUX 1, AUX 2,
TAPE, TUNER, CD, PHONO.
D ZONE 3 indicator (111)
Flashes when Zone 3 is being set. Lights up when
Zone 3 is on.
Receives control signals from the remote controller.
F Display
See “Display” on page 10.
G DISPLAY button (77)
Displays various information about the currently
selected input source.
H MASTER VOLUME control (57)
Sets the volume of the AV controller to –∞ dB,
–81.5 dB, –81.0 dB through +18.0 dB (relative dis-
play).
The volume level can also be displayed as an abso-
lute value. See “Volume Setup” on page 104.
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting to Know the AV Controller—Continued
L
M NO P QR STU V W X
Y
Z
PUSH TO OPEN
TUNING
RETURN
ZONE
ZONE
2
3
OFF
LEVEL
TONE
HDMI OUT
STEREO
THX
AUX
2
INPUT
SETUP MIC
TUNING
PHONES
DIMMER MEMORY MODE
SETUP
PRESET
CLEAR
VIDEO
L
AUDIO
R
S
VIDEO
DIGITAL
DIGITAL INPUT
LISTENING MODE
ENTER
TUNING
a b c
L PHONES jack (77)
X RETURN button
This 1/4-inch phone jack is for connecting a stan-
dard pair of stereo headphones for private listening.
Selects the previously displayed onscreen setup
menu.
M ZONE 2, ZONE 3, and OFF buttons (112)
Y SETUP MIC (52)
The ZONE 2 button is used when setting Zone 2.
The automatic speaker setup microphone connects
here.
The ZONE 3 button is used when setting Zone 3.
Z AUX 2 INPUT (38, 87)
The OFF button is used to turn off Zone 2 or
Zone 3.
Used to connect a camcorder, game console, and so
on. There are input jacks for optical digital audio,
N LEVEL button (112)
Used when adjusting the volume level of Zone 2 or
Zone 3.
a Up [ ] and Down [ ] buttons (90, 112)
Used to adjust the tone, and the volume and balance
of Zone 2 and Zone 3.
O TONE button (113)
Used to adjust the tone (bass and treble).
b DIGITAL INPUT button (50)
P HDMI OUT (46)
Used to assign digital inputs to input selectors.
Used to set the HDMI Monitor setting.
c LISTENING MODE [ ]/[ ] buttons (79)
Q STEREO button (79)
Select the listening modes.
Selects the Stereo listening mode.
R THX button (79)
Selects the THX listening modes.
S DIMMER button (76)
Adjusts the display brightness.
T MEMORY button (75)
Used when storing or deleting radio presets.
U TUNING MODE button (58)
Selects the Auto or Manual tuning mode for AM
and FM radio.
V SETUP button
Opens and closes the onscreen setup menus, which
are displayed on the connected TV.
buttons
When AM or FM is selected, the TUNING [
]
[
] buttons are used for radio tuning, and the PRE-
SET [ ] [ ] buttons are used to select radio pre-
sets (see page 75). With the onscreen setup menus,
they work as arrow buttons and are used to select
and set items. The ENTER button is also used with
the onscreen setup menus.
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting to Know the AV Controller—Continued
Display
1 2
3 4
5 6
7
8 9 0
For detailed information, see the pages in parentheses.
1Speaker/channel indicators (84)
Indicate the speaker configuration and channels
used by the current input source.
5Audyssey indicator (52)
Lights up during automatic speaker setup.
6Headphone indicator (77)
into the PHONES jack.
–
: A box is displayed for each speaker that’s set
in the Speaker Configuration. No box appears for
speakers that are set to No or None.
7Message area
The following abbreviations indicate which audio
channels are included in the current input signal.
Displays various information.
8Audio input indicators (60, 78)
– FL: Front left
– C: Center
Indicate the type of audio input that’s selected as the
audio source: HDMI, ANALOG, or DIGITAL.
– FR: Front right
– SL: Surround left
While a digital HD Radio transmission is being
received, the DIGITAL indicator lights up. While an
the ANALOG indicator lights up.
– LFE: Subwoofer (Low Frequency Effects)
– SR: Surround right
– SBL: Surround back left
– SB: Surround back
– SBR: Surround back right
9Volume level (57)
Displays the volume level.
0MUTING indicator (76)
Show the selected listening mode and audio input
signal format.
Flashes while the AV controller is muted.
3Tuning indicators (58)
HD (60): Lights up if the current AM or FM station
SPS (61): Lights up when tuned to a HD Radio
station that’s transmitting secondary multicast chan-
nels.
AUTO (58): Lights up when Auto Tuning mode is
ual Tuning mode is selected.
TUNED (58): Lights up when tuned to a radio sta-
tion.
FM STEREO (58): Lights up when tuned to a ste-
reo FM station.
4SLEEP indicator (77)
Lights up when the Sleep function has been set.
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting to Know the AV Controller—Continued
Rear Panel
89
K
1 2 3 4 5
67
J
L M N
O
P
HDMI
ASSIGNABLE
AC INLET
OUT
OUT
SUB
IN
4
IN
3
IN
2
IN
XM
1
RS232
MAIN
HD RADIO
ETHERNET
MONITOR OUT
/ZONE OUT
2
ASSIGNABLE
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN IN IN 1(DVD)
SIRIUS
2
MONITOR
OUT
3
2
1
AM
Y
MONITOR
OUT
ZONE
OUT
2
DVD
AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT
VCR/DVR
IR
ANTENNA
V
V
A
B
C
AC OUTLET
REMOTE
CB/PB
IN
FM
75
CONTROL
12V TRIGGER OUT
ASSIGNABLE
COAXIAL
DIGITAL
ZONE
2
ZONE
3
IN
1
(DVD)
CR/PR
SW
L
S
FRONT CENTER
S
OUT
A
B
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
SURR SURR BACK FRONT CENTER SURR
SURR BACK
(VCR/DVR)
IN
IN
IN
IN
2
3
1
2
L
L
AC 120V 60Hz
SWITCHED
120W 1A MAX.
(CBL/SAT)
R
R
R
OPTICAL
SUBWOOFER
PHONO
CD
TAPE
AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT
VCR/DVR
DVD
SUBWOOFER PRE OUT
MULTI CH
PRE OUT
(GAME/TV)
(CD)
GND
BALANCE L
MONO
SURR BACK R
Bi-AMP
SURR BACK L
Bi-AMP
BALANCE R
SURR R
FRONT R
CENTER
FRONT L
SURR L
SUBWOOFER
2
1
1
2
3
3
OUT
HOT GND
COLD
GND HOT
COLD
INPUT
PRE OUT
Q R S T U V W X YZ ab c
d
e
f
G HDMI IN 1–4, OUT MAIN, and OUT SUB
HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) con-
nections carry digital audio and digital video.
A
REMOTE CONTROL
This
(Remote Interactive) jack can be con-
nected to the
jack on another
-capable
with an HDMI output, such as a DVD player, DVD
recorder, or DVR (digital video recorder). They’re
assignable, which means you can assign each one to
an input selector to suit your setup. See “HDMI
Input Setup” on page 47.
Onkyo component for remote and system control.
To use , you must make an analog audio connec-
tion (RCA) between the AV controller and the other
component, even if they are connected digitally.
B RS232
This port is for connecting the AV controller to
The HDMI outputs are for connecting a TV or pro-
jector with an HDMI input.
home automation equipment and external control-
lers.
H SIRIUS antenna
C PHONO IN
This jack is for connecting a SIRIUS digital
antenna, sold separately (see page 67).
This audio input is for connecting a turntable.
D COMPONENT VIDEO IN 1, 2, and 3
such as a DVD player, DVD recorder, or DVR (dig-
ital video recorder). They’re assignable, which
means you can assign each one to an input selector
to suit your setup. See “Component Video Input
Setup” on page 48.
I XM antenna
This jack is for connecting an XM Mini-Tuner and
Home Dock, sold separately (see page 62).
J MONITOR OUT
The S-Video or composite video jack should be
connected to a video input on your TV or projector.
K ZONE 2 OUT
This composite video output can be connected to a
video input on a TV in Zone 2.
E COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT 1
This RCA component video output is for connect-
ing a TV or projector with a component video input.
L IR IN A/B and OUT
A commercially available IR receiver can be con-
nected to the IR IN A or B jack, allowing you to
control the AV controller while you’re in Zone 2, or
control it when it’s out of sight, for example,
installed in a cabinet.
F COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT 2/
ZONE 2 OUT
This RCA component video output is for connect-
ing a TV or projector with a component video input
located in your main listening room or Zone 2.
A commercially available IR emitter can be con-
nected to the IR OUT jack to pass IR (infrared)
remote control signals through to other components.
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting to Know the AV Controller—Continued
M 12V TRIGGER OUT (A/B/C)
Y CBL/SAT IN
These outputs can be connected to the 12-volt trig-
ger inputs on other components.
A cable or satellite receiver can be connected here.
There’s S-Video and composite video input jacks
for connecting the video signal.
N ETHERNET
This port is for connecting the AV controller to
home automation equipment and external control-
lers. Use only shielded Ethernet cables.
Z VCR/DVR IN/OUT
A video component, such as a VCR or DVR, can be
connected here for recording and playback. There’s
S-Video and composite video input and output jacks
for connecting the video signal.
O AM and FM ANTENNA (HD Radio)
The AM push terminals are for connecting an AM
antenna. The FM jack is for connecting an FM
antenna.
a DVD IN
This input is for connecting a DVD player. There’s
S-Video and composite video input jacks for con-
necting the video signal.
P AC INLET
The supplied power cord is connected here. The
other end of the power cord should be connected to
a suitable wall outlet.
b FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURR L/R, SURR
BACK L/R, and SUBWOOFER PREOUT
multichannel power amplifier and powered sub-
woofer.
Q DIGITAL COAXIAL IN 1, 2, and 3
ing components with a coaxial digital audio output,
such as a CD player or DVD player. They’re assign-
able, which means you can assign each one to an
input selector to suit your setup. See “Digital Input
Setup” on page 49.
The FRONT L/R and SURR BACK L/R outputs can
be used with front speakers and surround back
speakers, respectively, or used to bi-amp the front
speakers. See “Bi-amping the Front Speakers” on
R DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 1, 2, and OUT
components with an optical digital audio output,
such as a CD player or DVD player. They’re assign-
able, which means you can assign each one to an
input selector to suit your setup. See “Digital Input
Setup” on page 49.
c MULTI CH input: FRONT L/R, CENTER,
SUBWOOFER, SURR L/R, and SURR BACK
L/R
This analog multichannel input is for connecting a
component with a 5.1/7.1-channel analog audio out-
put, such as a DVD player, DVD-Audio or
SACD-capable player, or an MPEG decoder.
The optical digital audio output is for connecting a
digital recorder with an optical digital input, such as
a CD recorder.
d PRE OUT: FRONT L/R, CENTER,
SUBWOOFER, SURR L/R, and SURR BACK
L/R
S GND screw
This 5.1/7.1 multichannel analog audio output can
be connected to the analog audio input on a multi-
channel power amplifier for when you want to use
the AV controller solely as a preamplifier. The SUB-
WOOFER jack is for connecting a powered sub-
woofer.
This screw is for connecting a turntable’s ground
wire.
T BALANCE L/R INPUT
This balanced XLR input is for connecting a com-
ponent with a stereo balanced XLR output. For a
mono source, connect to the BALANCE L XLR.
e PRE OUT: ZONE 2, ZONE 3
U CD IN
These analog audio outputs can be connected to the
line inputs on amplifiers in Zone 2 and Zone 3. The
SW jacks can be connected to the inputs on pow-
ered subwoofers in Zone 2 and Zone 3.
This analog audio input is for connecting a CD
player’s analog audio output.
V TAPE IN/OUT
These analog audio input and output jacks are for
connecting a recorder with an analog audio input and
output, such as a cassette deck, MD recorder, etc.
f AC OUTLET
These switched AC outlets can be used to supply
power to other AV components. The type and num-
ber of outlets depends on the country in which you
purchased your AV controller.
W AUX 1 IN
A VCR for playback only or other video source can
be connected here. There’s S-Video and composite
video input jacks for connecting the video signal.
X GAME/TV IN
A game console or TV output can be connected
here. There’s S-Video and composite video input
jacks for connecting the video signal.
See pages 19–42 for hookup information.
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Controller
Installing the Batteries
Using the Remote Controller
When using the remote controller, point it toward the AV
controller’s remote control sensor, as shown below.
To open the battery compartment, press
the small hollow and slide open the cover.
1
Remote control sensor
STANDBY indicator
AV controller
30˚
30˚
Insert the three supplied batteries (AA/R6)
in accordance with the polarity diagram
inside the battery compartment.
2
Approx. 16 ft.
(5 m)
Notes:
• The remote controller may not work reliably if the AV
controller is subjected to bright light, such as direct
sunlight or inverter-type fluorescent lights. Keep this
in mind when installing.
• If another remote controller of the same type is used in
the same room, or the AV controller is installed close
to equipment that uses infrared rays, the remote con-
troller may not work reliably.
Slide the cover shut.
3
• Don’t put anything on top of the remote controller,
such as a book or magazine, because a button may be
pressed continuously, thereby draining the batteries.
• The remote controller may not work reliably if the AV
controller is installed in a rack behind colored glass
doors. Keep this in mind when installing.
• The remote controller will not work if there’s an obsta-
cle between it and the AV controller’s remote control
sensor.
Notes:
• If the remote controller doesn’t work reliably, try
replacing the batteries.
• Don’t mix new and old batteries or different types of
batteries.
• If you intend not to use the remote controller for a long
time, remove the batteries to prevent damage from
leakage or corrosion.
• Expired batteries should be removed as soon as possi-
ble to prevent damage from leakage or corrosion.
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Controller—Continued
About the Remote Controller Modes
RECEIVER/TAPE Mode
As well as the AV controller, you can also use the remote
controller to control your other AV components. The
remote controller has a specific operating mode for use
with each type of component. Modes are selected by
using the REMOTE MODE buttons.
RECEIVER/TAPE mode is used to control the AV con-
troller. It can also be used to control an Onkyo cassette
recorder connected via
.
To set the remote controller to RECEIVER/TAPE
mode, press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE MODE
button.
■ RECEIVER/TAPE Mode
In RECEIVER/TAPE mode, you can control the AV
controller and an Onkyo cassette recorder connected via
.
A
ON
STANDBY
TV
■ DVD Mode
INPUT
B
C
By default, you can control an Onkyo DVD player in this
mode. By entering the appropriate remote control code,
you can control components made by other manufactur-
ers (see page 116).
L
M
DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
3
+
TV CH
-
1
GAME/TV
4
2
AUX1
5
AUX2
6
TAPE
7
TUNER
8
CD
9
■ CD/CDR/MD Mode
TV VOL
PHONO
D. TUN
By default, you can control an Onkyo CD player in this
mode. By entering the appropriate remote control code,
you can control a CD player, MD recorder, or CD
recorder made by another manufacturer (see page 116).
+10
-- --- 10
/
INPUT SELECTOR
MACRO
CLEAR
0
11
12
D
ZONE
3
2
1
2
3
REMOTE MODE
DVD
VCR
CD
ZONE
CDR/MD
■ DOCK Mode
RECEIVER
TV
CABLE
SAT
DOCK
RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
N
O
This mode is for controlling an Apple iPod in an Onkyo
RI Dock. By default, you can control an RI Dock that has
a remote control sensor, such as the DS-A2. To control
appropriate remote control code first (see page 116).
TAPE/AMP
DIMMER
5
F
, you must enter the
+
CH
ENTER
VOL
DISC
ALBUM
G
P
■ TV and VCR Modes
-
With these modes, you can control a TV and VCR. You
page 116).
H
I
Q
R
PREV
CH
DISPLAY
MUTING
■ CABLE/SAT Mode
1
lite TV receiver. You must enter the appropriate remote
control code first (see page 116).
REC
PLAYLIST
RANDOM
LISTENING MODE
SURR
STEREO
■ ZONE 2/ZONE 3 Modes
These modes are for controlling Zone 2 and Zone 3 (see
page 111).
J
K
REPEAT
PURE A
AUDIO
DIRECT
SUBTITLE PLAY MODE
THX
ALL ST
-
+
LEVEL
TEST TONE
CH SEL
LEVEL
OPEN/CLOSE VIDEO OFF
AUDIO SEL
L NIGHT
DVD
Re-EQ
HDD
S
T
VCR
Use the REMOTE MODE buttons to select
a mode.
1
RC-690
M
U
Use the buttons supported by that mode
2
to control the component.
RECEIVER/TAPE mode: see right col-
umn
Note:
DVD mode: see page 16
• Some of the remote controller functions described in
this manual may not work as expected with other com-
ponents.
CD/MD/CDR mode: see page 17
DOCK mode: see page 18
TV, VCR, CABLE/SAT modes: see page 118
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
T L NIGHT button (89)
Turns the Late Night function on or off.
A STANDBY button (43)
U AUDIO SEL button (78)
Selects the audio input: analog, digital, HDMI, or
multichannel.
Sets the AV controller to Standby.
B ON button (43)
Turns on the AV controller.
■ TAPE mode
Used to select the input source.
On twin cassette decks, only Deck B can be controlled.
1Previous and Next [
The Previous [ ] button selects the previous
track. During playback it selects the beginning of
]/[
] buttons
D MACRO buttons (120)
Used with the Macro function.
E DIMMER button (76)
the current track. The Next [
next track.
] button selects the
Adjusts the display brightness.
F Arrow [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] and ENTER buttons
Depending on how they were recorded, the Previous
and Next [ ]/[ ] buttons may not work prop-
Used to select and adjust settings.
G CH +/– button (75)
erly with some cassette tapes.
Selects radio presets.
Play [ ] button
H SETUP button
Starts playback.
Used to change settings.
Rewind and Fast Forward [ ]/[ ] buttons
The Rewind [ ] button starts rewind. The Fast
Forward [ ] button starts fast forward.
I DISPLAY button (77)
Displays information about the current input source.
J LISTENING MODE buttons (79)
Reverse Play [ ] button
Used to select the listening modes. The [STEREO],
[SURR], and LISTENING MODE [ ]/[ ] but-
tons can be used at any time, regardless of the cur-
rently selected remote controller mode.
Starts reverse playback.
Stop [ ] button
Stops playback.
REC [ ] button
Starts recording.
K TEST TONE, CH SEL, LEVEL–, and LEVEL+
buttons (76, 98)
L Light button
Turns the remote controller’s illuminated buttons on
or off.
M D.TUN button (59)
Selects the Direct tuning mode for radio.
N REMOTE MODE buttons (14)
Used to select the remote controller modes. When
the currently selected mode lights up.
O SLEEP button (77)
Used with the Sleep function.
P VOL [ ]/[ ] button (57)
Adjusts the volume of the AV controller regardless
Q RETURN button
Returns to the previous display when changing set-
tings.
R MUTING button (76)
Mutes or unmutes the AV controller.
S Re-EQ button (89)
Turns the Re-EQ function on or off.
15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Controller—Continued
A STANDBY button
DVD Mode
Sets the DVD player to Standby.
To set the remote controller to DVD mode, press the
[DVD] REMOTE MODE button.
B ON button
Turns on the DVD player.
C Number buttons
Used to enter title, chapter, and track numbers, and
to enter times for locating specific points.
D TOP MENU button
Selects a DVD’s top menu.
A
E Arrow [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] and ENTER buttons
ON
STANDBY
TV
Used to navigate menus and select items.
B
C
INPUT
DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
3
F DISC +/– button
+
TV CH
-
1
GAME/TV
4
2
AUX1
5
Selects discs on a DVD changer.
AUX2
6
G SETUP button
TAPE
7
TUNER
8
CD
9
Used to access the DVD player’s settings.
TV VOL
PHONO
D. TUN
H DISPLAY button
+10
-- --- 10
/
INPUT SELECTOR
MACRO
CLEAR
0
11
12
Displays information about the current disc, title,
chapter, or track, including elapsed time, remaining
time, total time, and so on.
M
ZONE
3
2
1
2
3
REMOTE MODE
DVD
VCR
CD
ZONE
I Playback buttons
CDR/MD
DVD
From left to right: Previous, Play, Next, Rewind,
Pause, Stop, Fast Forward, Slow Reverse, and Slow
Forward.
TV
CABLE
SAT
DOCK
RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
D
E
DIMMER
N
J REPEAT button
+
Used with the repeat playback function.
CH
ENTER
VOL
DISC
ALBUM
F
K AUDIO button
-
Selects foreign language soundtracks and audio for-
mats (e.g., Dolby Digital or DTS).
O
G
H
PREV
CH
DISPLAY
MUTING
L OPEN/CLOSE [ ] button
Opens and closes the disc tray.
I
M CLEAR button
REC
PLAYLIST
RANDOM
Cancels functions and clears entered numbers.
P
LISTENING MODE
SURR
N MENU button
STEREO
Displays a DVD’s menu.
REPEAT
PURE A
AUDIO
DIRECT
SUBTITLE PLAY MODE
THX
ALL ST
J
K
Q
R
O RETURN button
Exits the DVD player’s onscreen setup menu.
-
+
LEVEL
TEST TONE
CH SEL
LEVEL
OPEN/CLOSE VIDEO OFF
P RANDOM button
AUDIO SEL
L NIGHT
DVD
Re-EQ
HDD
L
VCR
Used with the random playback function.
S
RC-690
M
Q PLAY MODE button
Selects play modes on components with selectable
play modes.
R SUBTITLE button
Selects subtitles.
S VIDEO OFF button
Turns off the internal video circuitry, eliminating
any possibility of interference.
16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Controller—Continued
A STANDBY button
CD/MD/CDR Modes
Sets the component to Standby.
To control an Onkyo CD player, MD recorder, or CD
recorder, or a CD or MD player/recorder made by
another manufacturer, press the [CD] REMOTE
troller mode.
In order to control an Onkyo MD recorder or CD
recorder, or a component made by another manufacturer,
you must first enter the appropriate remote control code
(see page 116).
B ON button
Set the component to On or Standby.
C Number buttons
Used to enter track numbers and times for locating
specific points.
D Arrow [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] and ENTER buttons
Used with some components.
E DISC +/– button
Selects discs on a CD changer.
F DISPLAY button
Displays information about the current disc or track,
including elapsed time, remaining time, total time,
and so on.
A
ON
STANDBY
TV
INPUT
B
C
G Playback buttons
DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
3
+
TV CH
-
1
GAME/TV
4
2
AUX1
5
From left to right: Previous, Play, Next, Rewind,
Pause, Stop, and Fast Forward.
AUX
6
2
TAPE
7
TUNER
8
CD
9
H REC [ ] button
Starts recording.
TV VOL
PHONO
D. TUN
+10
-- --- 10
/
INPUT SELECTOR
MACRO
CLEAR
0
11
12
I REPEAT button
K
Used with the repeat playback function.
ZONE
3
2
1
2
3
J OPEN/CLOSE [ ] button
REMOTE MODE
CD
DVD
VCR
CD
ZONE
Opens or closes the disc tray or ejects the MiniDisc.
CDR/MD
CDR/MD
TV
CABLE
SAT
DOCK
RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
K CLEAR button
Cancels functions and clears entered numbers.
DIMMER
L RETURN button
D
E
Used with some components.
+
CH
ENTER
VOL
DISC
ALBUM
M RANDOM button
Used with the random playback function.
-
PREV
CH
N PLAY MODE button
F
7
8
Selects play modes on components with selectable
play modes.
DISPLAY
MUTING
L
REC
PLAYLIST
RANDOM
M
N
LISTENING MODE
SURR
STEREO
REPEAT
PURE A
AUDIO
DIRECT
SUBTITLE PLAY MODE
THX
ALL ST
9
J
-
+
LEVEL
TEST TONE
CH SEL
LEVEL
OPEN/CLOSE VIDEO OFF
AUDIO SEL
L NIGHT
DVD
Re-EQ
HDD
VCR
RC-690
M
17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Controller—Continued
A STANDBY button
DOCK Mode
Turns off the iPod.
DOCK mode is for controlling an Apple iPod in an
Onkyo RI Dock.
B ON button*
Turns on the iPod.
When Using an RI Dock:
IN L/R jacks.
C TOP MENU button
Works as a Mode button when used with a DS-A2
RI Dock.
• Set the RI Dock’s RI MODE switch to HDD or
HDD/DOCK.
D Arrow [ ]/[ ] and ENTER buttons*
Used to navigate menus and select items.
• Set the AV controller’s Input Display to DOCK (see
page 49).
E ALBUM +/– button*
Selects the next or previous album.
• To control a DS-A1 RI Dock, you must enter the
appropriate remote control code first (see page 116).
F DISPLAY button*
• See to the RI Dock’s instruction manual for more
information.
Turns on the backlight for 30 seconds.
G Previous [
] button
To set the remote controller to DOCK mode, press the
[DOCK] REMOTE MODE button.
Restarts the current song. Press it twice to select the
previous song.
H Pause [ ] button
Pauses playback. (With 3rd generation iPods, it
works as a Play/Pause button.)
A
ON
STANDBY
TV
I Rewind [ ] button
INPUT
B
Press and hold to rewind.
DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
3
+
TV CH
-
1
GAME/TV
4
2
AUX1
5
J PLAYLIST [ ]/[ ] buttons*
Used to select the previous or next playlist on the
iPod.
AUX2
6
TAPE
7
TUNER
8
CD
9
TV VOL
K REPEAT button*
PHONO
D. TUN
+10
-- --- 10
/
INPUT SELECTOR
MACRO
CLEAR
0
Used with the repeat function.
11
12
L MENU button*
ZONE
3
2
1
2
3
Used to access menus.
REMOTE MODE
DVD
VCR
CD
ZONE
M Play [ ] button
CDR/MD
DOCK
Starts playback. If the component is off, it will turn
on automatically. (With 3rd generation iPods, this
button works as a Play/Pause button.)
TV
CABLE
SAT
DOCK
RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
DIMMER
C
4
L
N Next [
] button
+
Selects the next song.
CH
ENTER
VOL
DISC
ALBUM
5
6
O Stop [ ] button
-
Stops playback and displays a menu.
PREV
CH
M
P Fast Forward [ ] button
DISPLAY
MUTING
Press and hold to fast forward.
N
O
P
Q
7
8
Q RANDOM button*
Used with the shuffle function.
9
REC
PLAYLIST
RANDOM
R PLAY MODE button
J
LISTENING MODE
SURR
Used to select play modes on components with
selectable play modes.
Works as a Resume button when used with a DS-A2
RI Dock.
STEREO
REPEAT
PURE A
AUDIO
DIRECT
SUBTITLE PLAY MODE
THX
ALL ST
K
R
-
+
LEVEL
TEST TONE
CH SEL
LEVEL
OPEN/CLOSE VIDEO OFF
AUDIO SEL
L NIGHT
DVD
Re-EQ
HDD
*Buttons marked with an asterisk (*) are not supported
by 3rd generation iPods.
VCR
RC-690
M
18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting a Power Amplifier and Speakers
Enjoying Home Theater
Thanks to the AV controller’s superb capabilities, you can enjoy surround sound with a real sense of movement in your
own home—just like being in a movie theater or concert hall. You can enjoy DVDs featuring Dolby Digital or DTS.
With analog or digital TV, you can enjoy Dolby Pro Logic IIx, DTS Neo:6, or Onkyo’s original DSP listening modes.
You can also enjoy THX Surround EX (THX-certified THX speaker system recommended).
Surround left and right speakers
These speakers are used for precise
sound positioning and to add realistic
ambience.
Front left and right speakers
These output the main sound.Their role in a home theater is to provide a solid
anchor for the sound image. They should be positioned facing the listener at
about ear level, and equally spaced from the TV. Angle them inward slightly so
as to create a triangle, with the listener at the apex.
Position them at the sides of the lis-
tener, or slightly behind, about 2–3 feet
(60–100 cm) above ear level. Ideally
they should be equally spaced from the
listener.
Center speaker
This speaker enhances the front left
and right speakers, making sound
movements distinct and providing a
full sound image. For movies it’s used
mainly for dialog.
Position it close to yourTV (preferably
on top) facing forward at about ear
level, or at the same height as the
front left and right speakers.
Subwoofer
The subwoofer handles the bass sounds of
the LFE (Low-Frequency Effects) channel.
The volume and quality of the bass output
from your subwoofer will depend on its posi-
tion, the shape of your listening room, and
your listening position.In general, a good bass
sound can be obtained by installing the sub-
woofer in a front corner, or at one-third the way
along the front wall, as shown.
Surround back left and right speakers
These speakers are necessary to enjoy Dolby Digital
EX, DTS-ES Matrix, DTS-ES Discrete, THX Surround
EX, etc. They enhance the realism of surround sound
and improve sound localization behind the listener. Posi-
tion them behind the listener about 2–3 feet
(60–100 cm) above ear level.
Tip: To find the best position for your sub-
woofer, while playing a movie or some music
with good bass, experiment by placing your
subwoofer at various positions within the
room and choose the
one that provides
the most satisfying
results.
Corner
position
1/3 of wall
position
19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting a Power Amplifier and Speakers—Continued
Using Dipole Speakers
ConnectingYour Speakers
You can use dipole speakers for the surround left and
right and surround back left and right speakers. Dipole
speakers output the same sound in two directions.
The AV controller is designed to be used with a separate
multichannel power amplifier. You connect the AV con-
troller’s PRE OUT jacks to the amplifier’s inputs, and
connect your speakers to the amplifier’s speakers termi-
nals. Speaker settings such as crossover frequency and
distance are set on the AV controller.
Dipole speakers typically have an arrow printed on them to
indicate how they should be positioned. The surround left
and right dipole speakers should be positioned so that their
arrows point toward your TV or screen, while the surround
back left and right dipolar speakers should be positioned
so that their arrows point toward each other, as shown.
Speaker Configuration
For the best surround-sound experience, you should use
seven speakers and a powered subwoofer.
Normal speakers
Dipole speakers
The following table shows which channels you should
use based on the number of speakers you have.
1
TV/screen
1
TV/screen
4
2
3
4
2
3
Number of speakers:
Front left
2
3
4
5
6
7
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
Front right
5
6
5
6
Center
Surround left
✓
✓
Surround right
Surround back*
Surround back left
Surround back right
7
8
7
8
1. Subwoofer
2. Front left speaker
3. Center speaker
6. Surround right speaker
7. Surround back left
speaker
✓
✓
4. Front right speaker
5. Surround left speaker
8. Surround back right
speaker
* If you’re using only one surround back speaker, use the SURR
BACK L output.
No matter how many speakers you use, a powered sub-
woofer is recommended for a powerful and solid bass.
To get the best from your surround-sound system, you
must set the speaker settings. You can do this automati-
cally (see page 52) or manually (see page 94).
20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting a Power Amplifier and Speakers—Continued
Connecting a Powered Subwoofer
Using a suitable cable, connect the AV controller’s SUB-
WOOFER PRE OUT to the input on your powered sub-
woofer. If your subwoofer is unpowered and you’re
using an external amplifier, connect the SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT to the amp’s input.
You can also connect a powered subwoofer to the AV
controller’s balanced SUBWOOFER PRE OUT XLR
jack by using a balanced XLR cable.
HDMI
ASSIGNABLE
OUT
OUT
SUB
RS232
IN
4
IN
3
IN
2
IN
1
MAIN
HD
XM
ETHERNET
MONITOR OUT
/ZONE OUT
2
ASSIGNABLE
MONITOR
OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN IN IN 1(DVD)
SIRIUS
2
3
2
1
AM
Y
MONITOR
OUT
AUX
1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT
VCR/DVR
DVD
IR
A
V
V
A
B
C
HDMI
ASSIGNABLE
REMOTE
CB/PB
ZONE
OUT
2
IN
FM
75
CONTROL
OUT
OUT
SUB
RS232
IN
4
IN
3
IN
2
IN
1
12V TRIGGER OUT
MAIN
ASSIGNABLE
COAXIAL
DIGITAL
Powered
subwoofer
ZONE
2
ZONE
3
XM
Powered
subwoofer
IN
1
(DVD)
CR/PR
ETHERNET
SW
L
MONITOR OUT
/ZONE OUT
2
S
FRONT CENTER
OUT
SURR SURR BACK FRONT CENTER SURR
ASSIGNABLE
MONITOR
OUT
S
A
B
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN IN IN 1(DVD)
SIRIUS
2
3
2
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
SURR BACK
1
IN
IN
IN
IN
2
3
1
2
(VCR/DVR)
L
L
Y
MONITOR
OUT
AUX
1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT
VCR/DVR
DVD
IR
V
V
A
IN
B
C
(CBL/SAT)
REMOTE
CB/PB
ZONE
OUT
2
R
R
R
CONTROL
OPTICAL
12V TRIGGER OUT
SUBWOOFER PRE OUT
PRE OUT
ASSIGNABLE
COAXIAL
SUBWOOFER
MULTI CH
DIGITAL
PHONO
CD
TAPE
AUX
1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT
R
VCR/DVR
FRONT
DVD
ZONE
2
ZON
IN
1
(DVD)
(GAME/TV)
(CD)
CR/PR
GND
BALANCE
MONO
L
SURR BACK
Bi-AMP
SURR BACK
Bi-AMP
L
BALANCE
R
SURR
R
R
CENTER
FRONT
L
SURR
L
SUBWOOFER
S
FRONT CENTER
OUT
SURR SURR BACK FRONT CENTER SURR
S
A
B
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
SURR BACK
INPUT
IN
IN
IN
IN
2
3
1
2
(VCR/DVR)
2
1
1
2
L
L
3
3
OUT
HOT GND
COLD
GND HOT
COLD
(CBL/SAT)
R
R
OPTICAL
INPUT
PRE OUT
SUBWOOFER
SUBWOOFER PRE OUT
PRE OUT
PHONO
LINE INPUT
CD
TAPE
AUX
1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT
R
VCR/DVR
FRONT
DVD
MULTI CH
(GAME/TV)
(CD)
GND
BALANCE
MONO
L
SURR BACK
Bi-AMP
SURR BACK
Bi-AMP
L
BALANCE
R
SURR
R
R
CENTER
FRONT
L
SURR
L
SUBWOOFER
2
1
3
OUT
HOT GND
COLD
G
INPUT
PRE
INPUT
SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT
LINE INPUT
Balanced
XLR cable
SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT
Connecting a Power Amplifier with RCA Inputs
You can connect the AV controller to a multichannel power amplifier with RCA input jacks by using a multichannel
RCA audio cable or several stereo RCA audio cables.
See your multichannel power amplifier’s instruction manual for more information on connecting speakers.
MONITOR
V
E
REMOTE
CONTROL
C
B/PB
ZONE
OUT
2
IN
FM
75
12V TRIGGER OUT
ASSIGNABLE
COAXIAL
DIGITAL
ZONE
2
ZONE
3
IN
1
(DVD)
C
R/PR
SW
L
S
FRONT CENTER
S
OUT
A
B
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
SURR SURR BACK FRONT CENTER SURR
SURR BACK
(VCR/DVR)
IN
IN
IN
IN
2
3
1
2
L
L
AC 120V 60Hz
SWITCHED
120W 1A MAX.
(CBL/SAT)
R
R
R
OPTICAL
SUBWOOFER
CD
TAPE
AUX
1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT
R
VCR/DVR
FRONT
DVD
MULTI CH
SUBWOOFER PRE OUT
PRE OUT
PHONO
(GAME/TV)
(CD)
GND
BALANCE
MONO
L
SURR BACK
Bi-AMP
SURR BACK
Bi-AMP
L
BALANCE
R
SURR
R
R
CENTER
FRONT
L
SURR
L
SUBWOOFER
2
1
1
2
3
3
OUT
HOT GND
COLD
GND HOT
COLD
INPUT
PRE OUT
AV controller
Multichannel
power amplifier
SURROUND
RIGHT
FRONT
RIGHT
FRONT
LEFT
SURROUND
LEFT
SURROUND BACK
LEFT
SURROUND BACK
RIGHT
CENTER
INPUT
SELECT
INPUT
SELECT
INPUT
SELECT
INPUT
SELECT
INPUT
SELECT
INPUT
SELECT
INPUT
SELECT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
Surround
back right
speaker
Surround
right
speaker
Front right
speaker
Center
speaker
Front left
speaker
Surround
left
speaker
Surround
back left
speaker
21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting a Power Amplifier and Speakers—Continued
Connecting a Power Amplifier with XLR Inputs
You can connect the AV controller to a multichannel power amplifier with balanced XLR input jacks by using several
XLR audio cables.
The AV controller’s balanced PRE OUT XLR jacks are wired as shown.
1
2
3
GND HOT
COLD
See your multichannel power amplifier’s instruction manual for more information on connecting speakers.
AV controller
HDMI
ASSIGNABLE
AC INLET
OUT
OUT
SUB
IN
4
IN
3
IN
2
IN
XM
1
RS232
MAIN
HD RADIO
ETHERNET
MONITOR OUT
/ZONE OUT
2
ASSIGNABLE
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN IN IN 1(DVD)
SIRIUS
2
MONITOR
OUT
3
2
1
AM
Y
MONITOR
OUT
DVD
IR
AUX
1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT
VCR/DVR
ANTENNA
V
V
A
B
C
AC OUTLET
REMOTE
C
C
B/PB
ZONE
OUT
2
IN
FM
75
CONTROL
12V TRIGGER OUT
ASSIGNABLE
COAXIAL
DIGITAL
ZONE
2
ZONE
3
IN
1
(DVD)
R/PR
SW
L
S
FRONT CENTER
S
OUT
A
B
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
SURR SURR BACK FRONT CENTER SURR
SURR BACK
(VCR/DVR)
IN
IN
IN
IN
2
3
1
2
L
L
AC 120V 60Hz
SWITCHED
120W 1A MAX.
(CBL/SAT)
R
R
R
OPTICAL
SUBWOOFER
CD
TAPE
AUX
1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT
R
VCR/DVR
FRONT
DVD
MULTI CH
SUBWOOFER PRE OUT
PRE OUT
PHONO
(GAME/TV)
(CD)
GND
BALANCE
MONO
L
SURR BACK
Bi-AMP
SURR BACK
Bi-AMP
L
BALANCE
R
SURR
R
R
CENTER
FRONT
L
SURR
L
SUBWOOFER
2
1
1
2
3
3
OUT
HOT GND
COLD
GND HOT
COLD
INPUT
PRE OUT
Multichannel
power amplifier
SURROUND
RIGHT
FRONT
RIGHT
FRONT
LEFT
SURROUND
LEFT
SURROUND BACK
LEFT
SURROUND BACK
RIGHT
CENTER
INPUT
SELECT
INPUT
SELECT
INPUT
SELECT
INPUT
SELECT
INPUT
SELECT
INPUT
SELECT
INPUT
SELECT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
Surround
back right
speaker
Surround
right
speaker
Front right
speaker
Center
speaker
Front left
speaker
Surround
left
speaker
Surround
back left
speaker
22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting a Power Amplifier and Speakers—Continued
Bi-amping the Front Speakers
The FRONT L/R and SURR BACK L/R outputs can be used with front speakers and surround back speakers, respec-
tively, or bi-amped to provide separate tweeter and woofer feeds for a pair of front speakers that support bi-amping,
providing improved bass and treble performance.
• When bi-amping is used, the AV controller is able to feed up to 5.1 speakers in the main room.
• For bi-amping, the FRONT L/R outputs feed the front speakers’ tweeter terminals. And the SURR BACK L/R
outputs feed the front speakers’ woofer terminals.
• Once you’ve completed the bi-amping connections shown below and turned on the AV controller, you must set
the Speaker Type setting to Bi-Amp to enable bi-amping (see page 44).
Important:
• When making the bi-amping connections, be sure to remove the jumper bars that link the speakers’
tweeter (high) and woofer (low) terminals.
• Bi-amping can only be used with speakers that support bi-amping. Refer to your speaker manual.
See your multichannel power amplifier’s instruction manual for more information on connecting speakers.
Y
REMOTE
C
C
B/B
R/PR
ZONE
OUT
2
IN
FM
75
CONTROL
12V TRIGGER OUT
ASSIGNABLE
COAXIAL
DIGITAL
ZONE
2
ZONE
3
IN
1
(DVD)
SW
L
S
FRONT CENTER
S
OUT
A
B
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
SURR SURR BACK FRONT CENTER SURR
SURR BACK
(VCR/DVR)
IN
IN
IN
IN
2
3
1
2
L
L
AC 120V 60Hz
SWITCHED
120W 1A MAX.
(CBL/SAT)
R
R
R
OPTICAL
SUBWOOFER
CD
TAPE
AUX
1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT
R
VCR/DVR
FRONT
DVD
MULTI CH
SUBWOOFER PRE OUT
PRE OUT
PHONO
(GAME/TV)
(CD)
GND
BALANCE
MONO
L
SURR BACK
Bi-AMP
SURR BACK
Bi-AMP
L
BALANCE
R
SURR
R
R
CENTER
FRONT
L
SURR
L
SUBWOOFER
2
1
1
2
3
3
OUT
HOT GND
COLD
GND HOT
COLD
INPUT
PRE OUT
AV controller
Multichannel
power amplifier
SURROUND
RIGHT
FRONT
RIGHT
FRONT
LEFT
SURROUND
LEFT
SURROUND BACK
LEFT
SURROUND BACK
RIGHT
CENTER
INPUT
SELECT
INPUT
SELECT
INPUT
SELECT
INPUT
SELECT
INPUT
SELECT
INPUT
SELECT
INPUT
SELECT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
Surround right
speaker
Center speaker
Surround left
speaker
Woofer (low)
Tweeter (high)
Front right speaker
Front left speaker
23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting Antennas
This section explains how to connect the supplied indoor
FM antenna and AM loop antenna, and how to connect
commercially available outdoor FM and AM antennas.
Connecting the AM Loop Antenna
The supplied indoor AM loop antenna is for indoor use
only.
The AV controller won’t pick up any radio signals
without any antenna connected, so you must connect the
antenna to use the tuner.
Assemble the AM loop antenna, inserting
the tabs into the base, as shown.
1
AM antenna push terminals
HD RADIO
AM
ANTENNA
FM
75
Connect both wires of the AM loop
antenna to the AM push terminals, as
shown.
2
FM antenna jack
(The antenna’s wires are not polarity sensitive, so
they can be connected either way around).
Connecting the Indoor FM Antenna
Make sure that the wires are attached securely and
that the push terminals are gripping the bare
wires, not the insulation.
The supplied indoor FM antenna is for indoor use only.
Attach the FM antenna, as shown.
1
FM
75
Insert the plug fully
Push
Insert wire
Release
into the jack.
Once your AV controller is ready for use, you’ll
need to tune into an FM radio station and adjust
the position of the FM antenna to achieve the best
possible reception.
Once your AV controller is ready for use, you’ll
need to tune into an AM radio station and adjust
the position of theAM antenna to achieve the best
possible reception.
Use thumbtacks or something similar to
fix the FM antenna into position.
2
Keep the antenna as far away as possible from
cords.
Thumbtacks, etc.
If you cannot achieve good reception with the supplied
indoor AM loop antenna, try using it with a commer-
cially available outdoor AM antenna (see page 25).
when using thumbtacks.
If you cannot achieve good reception with the supplied
indoor FM antenna, try a commercially available out-
door FM antenna instead (see page 25).
24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting Antennas—Continued
Connecting an Outdoor FM Antenna
Connecting an Outdoor AM Antenna
If you cannot achieve good reception with the supplied
indoor FM antenna, try a commercially available out-
door FM antenna instead.
If good reception cannot be achieved using the supplied
AM loop antenna, an outdoorAM antenna can be used in
addition to the loop antenna, as shown.
Outdoor antenna
Insulated antenna cable
AM loop antenna
FM
75
Notes:
• Outdoor FM antennas work best outside, but usable
results can sometimes be obtained when installed in an
attic or loft.
OutdoorAM antennas work best when installed horizon-
tally outside, but good results can sometimes be obtained
indoors by mounting horizontally above a window. Note
that the AM loop antenna should be left connected.
• For best results, install the outdoor FM antenna well
away from tall buildings, preferably with a clear line
of sight to your local FM transmitter.
Outdoor antenna must be grounded in accordance with
local regulations to prevent electrical shock hazards.
• Outdoor antenna should be located away from possi-
ble noise sources, such as neon signs, busy roads, etc.
• For safety reasons, outdoor antenna should be situated
well away from power lines and other high-voltage
equipment.
• Outdoor antenna must be grounded in accordance
with local regulations to prevent electrical shock haz-
ards.
■ Using a TV/FM Antenna Splitter
It’s best not to use the same antenna for both FM and TV
reception, as this can cause interference problems. If cir-
cumstances demand it, use a TV/FM antenna splitter, as
shown.
TV/FM antenna splitter
To AV controller
To TV (or VCR)
25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ConnectingYour Components
AV Connection Color Coding
About AV Connections
RCA-type AV connections are usually color coded: red,
white, and yellow. Use red plugs to connect right-
channel audio inputs and outputs (typically labeled “R”).
Use white plugs to connect left-channel audio inputs and
outputs (typically labeled “L”). And use yellow plugs to
connect composite video inputs and outputs.
• Before making any AV connections, read the manuals
supplied with your other AV components.
• Don’t connect the power cord until you’ve completed
and double-checked all AV connections.
Optical Digital Jacks
Analog audio
Left (white)
Right (red)
Left (white)
Right (red)
The AV controller’s optical digital jacks have shutter-
type covers that open when an optical plug is inserted
and close when it’s removed. Push plugs in all the way.
Composite video
(Yellow)
(Yellow)
Right!
Caution: To prevent shutter damage, hold the optical
plug straight when inserting and removing.
• Push plugs in all the way to make
good connections (loose connections
can cause noise or malfunctions).
• To prevent interference, keep audio
and video cables away from power
cords and speaker cables.
Wrong!
AV Cables and Jacks
Video
Cable
Jack
Description
HDMI connections can carry uncompressed stan-
dard- or high-definition digital video and audio and
offer the best picture and sound quality.
HDMI
HDMI
Y
P
P
Y
Component video separates the luminance (Y) and
color difference signals (PR, PB), providing the best
picture quality. (Some TV manufacturers label their
component video jacks slightly differently.)
Y
Component
video cable
B
R
P
B
R
C
C
B/PB
P
R/PR
S-Video separates the luminance and color signals and
provides better picture quality than composite video.
S
S-Video cable
Composite video is commonly used on TVs, VCRs,
and other video equipment.
Composite
video cable
V
Audio
This offers the best sound quality and allows you to
enjoy Dolby Digital and DTS. The audio quality is the
same as for coaxial.
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
Optical digital
audio cable
This offers the best sound quality and allows you to
enjoy Dolby Digital and DTS. The audio quality is the
same as for optical.
Coaxial digital
audio cable
This cable carries analog audio. Balanced XLR
cables are used for better noise immunity and longer
cable runs.
Balanced XLR
cable
INPUT
PREOUT
This cable carries analog audio. It’s the most common
connection format for analog audio and can be found
on virtually all AV components.
L
Analog audio
cable (RCA)
R
This cable carries multichannel analog audio and is
typically used to connect DVD players with a 7.1-
channel analog audio output. Several standard analog
audio cables can be used instead of a multichannel
cable.
FRONT CENTER
SURR SURR BACK
Multichannel
analog audio
cable (RCA)
SUBWOOFER
MULTI CH
Note: The AV controller does not support SCART connections.
26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ConnectingYour Components—Continued
Connecting Audio and Video Signals to the AV Controller
By connecting both the audio and video outputs of your DVD player and other AV components to the AV controller,
you can switch the audio and video signals simultaneously simply by changing the input source on the AV controller.
: Signal Flow
Video
Video
Audio
Audio
TV, projector,
etc.
DVD player, etc.
On
Power
On Of
S
tandby
f
Seven Channel Amplifier RDA-7.1
Power amplifier and speakers
(see page 20 for hookup details)
Which Connections Should I Use?
The AV controller supports several connection formats for compatibility with a wide range ofAV equipment. The format
you choose will depend on the formats supported by your other components. Use the following sections as a guide.
For video components, you must make an audio connection and a video connection.
Video Connection Formats
Video equipment can be connected to the AV controller by using any one of the following video connection formats:
composite video, S-Video, component video, or HDMI, the latter offering the best picture quality.
The AV controller can upconvert and downconvert between video formats, depending on the HDMI Monitor setting,
which generally determines whether video signals are upconverted for the component video output or the HDMI output.
For optimal video performance, THX recommends that video signals pass through the system without upconver-
sion (e.g., component video input through to component video output). It’s also recommended that you set the
■ HDMI Monitor Setting Set to Main or Sub
With the HDMI Monitor setting set to Main or
Sub (see page 45), video input signals flow
through the AV controller as shown, with com-
Video Signal Flow Chart
DVD player, etc.
posite video, S-Video, and component video
sources all being upconverted for the HDMI
output. Use this setting if you connect the AV
Composite
S-Video
Component
HDMI
controller’s HDMI OUT to your TV.
IN
The composite video, S-Video, and component
video outputs pass through their respective
input signals as they are.
AV controller
MONITOR OUT
Composite
S-Video
Component
HDMI
TV, projector, etc.
27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ConnectingYour Components—Continued
■ HDMI Monitor Setting Set to No
With the HDMI Monitor setting set to No (see
page 45), video input signals flow through the
AV controller as shown, with composite video
and S-Video sources being upconverted for the
component video output. Use this setting if
you connect the AV controller’s COMPO-
NENTVIDEO MONITOR OUT 1 or COM-
PONENT VIDEO MONITOR
Video Signal Flow Chart
DVD player, etc.
Composite
S-Video
Component
HDMI
HDMI
IN
OUT 2/ZONE 2 OUT to your TV.
AV controller
Composite video is upconverted to S-Video
and S-Video is downconverted to composite
video. Note that these conversions only apply
to the MONITOR OUT V and S outputs, not
the VCR/DVR OUT V and S outputs.
MONITOR OUT
S-Video
Composite
Component
The composite video, S-Video, and component
video pass through their respective input sig-
nals as they are.
TV, projector, etc.
Audio Connection Formats
Audio equipment can be connected to the AV
controller by using any of the following audio
connection formats: analog, optical, coaxial,
analog multichannel, or HDMI.
Audio Signal Flow Chart
DVD player, etc.
When choosing a connection format, bear in
mind that the AV controller does not convert
digital input signals for analog line outputs and
vice versa. For example, audio signals con-
nected to an optical or coaxial digital input are
not output by the analog TAPE OUT.
HDMI
Optical Coaxial Analog Multichannel
AV controller
HDMI
Optical
Analog
1
2
Depends on the HDMI Audio Out setting (see page 107).
Only the front L/R channels are output.
*
*
MD recorder, etc.
28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ConnectingYour Components—Continued
Connecting a TV or Projector
Step 1:Video Connection
Choose a video connection that matches your TV (
,
, or ), and then make the connection.
A
B
C
Step 2: Audio Connection
Choose an audio connection that matches your TV (
,
, or ), and then make the connection.
a
b
c
• With connection , you can listen to and record audio from your TV or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3.
a
• To enjoy Dolby Digital and DTS, use connection or . (To record or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3 as well, use
b
c
and , or and .)
a
b
a
c
Connection
AV controller
Signal flow
TV
Picture quality
Best
COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT 1
MONITOR OUT S
Component video input
S-Video input
⇒
⇒
⇒
⇐
⇐
⇐
A
B
C
a
Better
MONITOR OUT V
Composite video input
Analog audio L/R output
Digital coaxial output
Digital optical output
Standard
GAME/TV IN L/R
DIGITAL COAXIAL IN 2
DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 1
b
c
ASSIGNABLE
OUT
OUT
SUB
IN 4
IN 3
IN 2
IN 1
XM
RS232
MAIN
MONITOR OUT
/ZONE OUT
2
ASSIGNABLE
COMPONENT VIDEO
SIRIUS
2
MONITOR
OUT
IN 3
IN 2
IN 1(DVD)
1
Y
C
MONITOR
OUT
DVD
AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT
VCR/DVR
V
V
A
IN
C
C
B/PB
REMOTE
NE
OUT
2
CONTROL
ASSIGNABLE
COAXIAL
DIGITAL
IN 1
(DVD)
R/PR
b
c
S
FRONT CENTER
S
OUT
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
SURR
B
(VCR/DVR)
IN 2
IN 3
IN 1
IN 2
OUT
L
L
(CBL/SAT)
R
R
OPTICAL
SUBWOOFER
PHONO
CD
TAPE
AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT
VCR/DVR
DVD
MULTI CH
a
(GAME/TV)
(CD)
GND
2
BALANCE L
MONO
SURR BACK R
Bi-AMP
CENTER
BALANCE R
SURR R
FRONT R
FRONT L
1
3
HOT GND
COLD
INPUT
A
L
R
COAXIAL
OUT
OPTICAL
OUT
Y
PB
PR
AUDIO
OUT
S VIDEO
IN
VIDEO
IN
COMPONENT VIDEO IN
Connect one
or the other
TV, projector,
etc.
If your TV has no audio outputs, connect an audio output from your VCR or cable or satellite
receiver to the AV controller and use its tuner to listen to TV programs through the AV controller
(see pages 32 and 34).
Hint!
29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ConnectingYour Components—Continued
Connecting a DVD player
Step 1:Video Connection
Choose a video connection that matches your DVD player (
,
, or ), and then make the connection.
A
B
C
If you use connection , you must connect the AV controller to your TV with the same type of connection.
A
Step 2: Audio Connection
Choose an audio connection that matches your DVD player (
,
, or ), and then make the connection.
a
b
c
• With connection , you can listen to and record audio from a DVD or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3.
a
• To enjoy Dolby Digital and DTS, use connection or . (To record or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3 as well, use
b
c
and , or and .)
a
b
a
c
• If your DVD player has main left and right outputs and multichannel left and right outputs, be sure to use the
main left and right outputs for connection
.
a
Connection
AV controller
Signal flow
DVD player
Picture quality
Best
COMPONENT VIDEO IN 1
DVD IN S
Component video output
S-Video output
⇐
⇐
⇐
⇐
⇐
⇐
A
B
C
a
Better
DVD IN V
Composite video output
Analog audio L/R output
Digital coaxial output
Digital optical output
Standard
DVD IN L/R
DIGITAL COAXIAL IN 1
DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 1
b
c
XM
MONITOR OUT
/ZONE OUT
2
ASSIGNABLE
COMPONENT VIDEO
SIRIUS
2
MONITOR
OUT
IN 3
IN 2
IN 1(DVD)
1
Y
MONITOR
DVD
AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT
V
VCR/DVR
OUT
IR
C
V
A
C
C
B/PB
REMOTE
ZONE
OUT
2
IN
CONTROL
b
ASSIGNABLE
COAXIAL
DIGITAL
IN 1
(DVD)
R/PR
S
FRONT CENTER
S
OUT
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
SURR SU
B
(VCR/DVR)
IN 2
IN 3
IN 1
IN 2
OUT
L
L
(CBL/SAT)
R
R
c
OPTICAL
SUBWOOFER
PHONO
MULTI CH
CD
TAPE
AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT
VCR/DVR
DVD
a
(GAME/TV)
(CD)
GND
2
BALANCE L
MONO
SURR BACK R
Bi-AMP
CENTER
BALANCE R
SURR R
FRONT R
FRONT L
1
A
3
HOT GND
COLD
INPUT
L
R
COAXIAL
OUT
OPTICAL
OUT
Y
PB
PR
AUDIO
OUT
S VIDEO
OUT
VIDEO
OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
Connect one
or the other
DVD player
To connect a DVD player or DVD-Audio/SACD-capable player with a
multichannel analog audio output, see page 31.
30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ConnectingYour Components—Continued
Hooking Up the Multichannel Input
If your DVD player supports multichannel audio formats such as DVD-Audio and SACD, and it has a multichannel
analog audio output, you can connect it to the AV controller’s multichannel input.
Use a multichannel analog audio cable, or several normal audio cables, to connect the AV controller’s MULTI CH
output on your DVD player. If your DVD player has a 5.1-channel analog audio output, don’t connect anything to the
AV controller’s SURR BACK L/R jacks.
Before using the multichannel input, you must assign it to an input selector. See “Analog Input Setup” on page 51. To
select the multichannel input, see “Selecting Audio Inputs” on page 78. To adjust the subwoofer sensitivity for the
multichannel input, see “Subwoofer Input Sensitivity” on page 107.
HDMI
ASSIGNABLE
OUT
OUT
SUB
IN
4
IN
3
IN
2
IN
XM
1
MAIN
RS232
MONITOR OUT
/ZONE OUT
2
SIRIUS
ASSIGNABLE
MONITOR
OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN IN IN 1(DVD)
2
3
2
1
Y
7.1 ch
5.1 ch
MONITOR
OUT
DVD
IR
AUX
1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT
VCR/DVR
V
V
A
IN
B
REMOTE
C
C
B/PB
ZONE
OUT
2
CONTROL
ASSIGNABLE
COAXIAL
DIGITAL
IN
1
(DVD)
R/PR
S
S
OUT
A
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
FRONT CENTER
SURR SURR BACK
(VCR/DVR)
IN
IN
IN
IN
2
3
1
2
FRONT
CENTER
SURR
SURR BACK
L
L
L
(CBL/SAT)
R
R
OPTICAL
L
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
PHONO
CD
TAPE
AUX
1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT
R
VCR/DVR
DVD
MULTI CH
(GAME/TV)
(CD)
GND
2
BALANCE
MONO
L
SURR BACK
Bi-AMP
BALANCE
R
SURR
R
FRONT
R
FRONT
L
R
R
1
3
SUBWOOFER
OUT
MULTI CH
HOT GND
COLD
INPUT
L
R
L
R
L
R
FRONT
CENTER
SUB
WOOFER
SURROUND
SURR
BACK
DVD player
31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ConnectingYour Components—Continued
Connecting a VCR or DVR for Playback
With this hookup, you can use the tuner in your VCR or DVR to listen to your favorite TV programs
via the AV controller, which is useful if your TV has no audio outputs.
Hint!
Step 1:Video Connection
Choose a video connection that matches your VCR or DVR (
,
, or ), and then make the connection. If you use
A
B
C
connection , you must connect the AV controller to your TV with the same type of connection.
A
Step 2: Audio Connection
Choose an audio connection that matches your VCR or DVR (
,
, or ), and then make the connection.
a
b
c
• With connection , you can listen to the VCR or DVR in Zone 2 or Zone 3.
a
• To enjoy Dolby Digital and DTS, use connection or . (To listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3 as well, use and
b
c
a
, or and .)
b
a
c
Connection
AV controller
COMPONENT VIDEO IN 2
VCR/DVR IN S
Signal flow
VCR or DVR
Picture quality
Best
Component video output
S-Video output
⇐
⇐
⇐
⇐
⇐
⇐
A
B
C
a
Better
VCR/DVR IN V
Composite video output
Analog audio L/R output
Digital coaxial output
Digital optical output
Standard
VCR/DVR IN L/R
DIGITAL COAXIAL IN 2
DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 1
b
c
HDMI
ASSIGNABLE
OUT
OUT
SUB
IN 4
IN 3
IN 2
IN 1
XM
RS232
MAIN
MONITOR OUT
/ZONE OUT
2
ASSIGNABLE
COMPONENT VIDEO
SIRIUS
2
MONITOR
OUT
IN 3
IN 2
IN 1(DVD)
1
Y
MONITOR
OUT
C
DVD
AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT
VCR/DVR
V
V
A
IN
C
C
B/PB
REMOTE
ZONE
OUT
2
CONTROL
ASSIGNABLE
COAXIAL
DIGITAL
IN 1
(DVD)
R/PR
S
FRONT CENTER
S
OUT
b
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
SURR
B
(VCR/DVR)
IN 2
IN 3
IN 1
IN 2
OUT
L
L
(CBL/SAT)
R
R
OPTICAL
SUBWOOFER
PHONO
CD
TAPE
AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT
VCR/DVR
DVD
MULTI C
a
(GAME/TV)
(CD)
GND
2
BALANCE L
MONO
SURR BACK R
Bi-AMP
CENTER
BALANCE R
SURR R
FRONT R
FRONT L
c
1
3
HOT GND
COLD
A
INPUT
L
R
COAXIAL
OUT
OPTICAL
OUT
Y
PB
PR
AUDIO
OUT
S VIDEO
OUT
VIDEO
OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
Connect one
or the other
VCR or DVR
32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ConnectingYour Components—Continued
Connecting a VCR or DVR for Recording
Step 1:Video Connection
Choose a video connection that matches your VCR or DVR ( or ), and then make the connection. The video
A
B
source to be recorded must be connected to the AV controller via the same type of connection.
Step 2: Audio Connection
Choose an audio connection that matches your VCR or DVR ( or ), and then make the connection.
a
b
Connection
AV controller
VCR/DVR OUT S
Signal flow
VCR or DVD recorder
Picture quality
Better
S-Video input
Composite video input
Audio L/R input
⇒
⇒
⇒
⇒
A
B
a
VCR/DVR OUT V
Standard
VCR/DVR OUT L/R
DIGITAL OPTICAL OUT
Digital optical input
b
HDMI
ASSIGNABLE
OUT
OUT
SUB
IN 4
IN 3
IN 2
IN 1
XM
RS232
MAIN
MONITOR OUT
/ZONE OUT
2
ASSIGNABLE
COMPONENT VIDEO
SIRIUS
2
MONITOR
OUT
IN 3
IN 2
IN 1(DVD)
1
Y
B
MONITOR
OUT
DVD
AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT
VCR/DVR
IR
V
V
A
IN
B
C
C
B/PB
REMOTE
ZONE
OUT
2
CONTROL
ASSIGNABLE
COAXIAL
DIGITAL
IN 1
(DVD)
R/PR
S
FRONT CENTER
S
OUT
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
SURR SURR
A
(VCR/DVR)
IN 2
IN 3
IN 1
IN 2
OUT
L
L
(CBL/SAT)
R
R
OPTICAL
SUBWOOFER
MULTI CH
PHONO
CD
TAPE
AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT
VCR/DVR
DVD
a
(GAME/TV)
(CD)
GND
2
BALANCE L
MONO
SURR BACK R
Bi-AMP
CENTER
BALANCE R
SURR R
FRONT R
FRONT L
b
1
3
HOT GND
COLD
INPUT
L
R
OPTICAL
IN
AUDIO
IN
S VIDEO
IN
VIDEO
IN
VCR or DVR
Notes:
• The AV controller must be turned on for recording. Recording is not possible while it’s on Standby.
• If you want to record directly from your TV or another video source without going through the AV controller, connect
the audio and video outputs from your TV or other video component directly to the recording VCR/DVR’s audio and
video inputs. See the manuals supplied with your TV or VCR/DVR for details.
• Video signals connected to composite video inputs can only be recorded via the VCR/DVR OUT V jack. So if your
source TV or VCR is connected to a composite video input, the recording VCR/DVR must be connected to the
VCR/DVR OUTV jack. Likewise, video signals connected to S-Video inputs can only be recorded via theVCR/DVR
OUT S jack. So if your source TV or VCR is connected to an S-Video input, the recording VCR/DVR must be
connected to the VCR/DVR OUT S jack.
33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ConnectingYour Components—Continued
Connecting a Satellite, Cable, or Terrestrial Set-top box or Other Video Source
With this hookup, you can use your satellite or cable receiver to listen to your favorite TV programs
via the AV controller, which is useful if your TV has no audio outputs.
Hint!
Step 1:Video Connection
Choose a video connection that matches the video source (
,
, or ), and then make the connection.
A
B
C
If you use connection , you must connect the AV controller to your TV with the same type of connection.
A
Step 2: Audio Connection
Choose an audio connection that matches the video source (
,
, or ), and then make the connection.
a
b
c
• With connection , you can listen to and record audio from the video source or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3.
a
• To enjoy Dolby Digital and DTS, use connection or . (To record or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3 as well, use
b
c
and , or and .)
a
b
a
c
Connection
AV controller
Signal flow
Video source
Component video output
S-Video output
Picture quality
Best
COMPONENT VIDEO IN 3
CBL/SAT IN S
⇐
⇐
⇐
⇐
⇐
⇐
A
B
C
a
Better
CBL/SAT IN V
Composite video output
Analog audio L/R output
Digital coaxial output
Digital optical output
Standard
CBL/SAT IN L/R
DIGITAL COAXIAL IN 3
DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 2
b
c
HDMI
ASSIGNABLE
OUT
OUT
SUB
IN 4
IN 3
IN 2
IN 1
XM
RS232
MAIN
MONITOR OUT
/ZONE OUT
2
ASSIGNABLE
COMPONENT VIDEO
SIRIUS
2
MONITOR
OUT
IN 3
IN 2
IN 1(DVD)
1
Y
C
MONITOR
OUT
DVD
AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT
VCR/DVR
IR
V
V
A
IN
B
C
C
B/PB
REMOTE
ZONE
OUT
2
CONTROL
ASSIGNABLE
COAXIAL
DIGITAL
IN 1
(DVD)
R/PR
S
FRONT CENTER
S
OUT
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
SURR SURR B
B
(VCR/DVR)
IN 2
IN 3
IN 1
IN 2
OUT
L
L
b
c
(CBL/SAT)
R
R
OPTICAL
SUBWOOFER
MULTI CH
PHONO
CD
TAPE
AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT
VCR/DVR
DVD
a
(GAME/TV)
(CD)
GND
2
BALANCE L
MONO
SURR BACK R
Bi-AMP
CENTER
BALANCE R
SURR R
FRONT R
FRONT L
1
3
HOT GND
COLD
INPUT
A
L
R
COAXIAL
OUT
OPTICAL
OUT
Y
PB
PR
AUDIO
OUT
S VIDEO
OUT
VIDEO
OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
Connect one
or the other
Satellite, cable, set-top box, etc.
34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ConnectingYour Components—Continued
Connecting Components with HDMI
About HDMI
Designed to meet the increased demands of digital TV, HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) is a new digital
interface standard for connecting TVs, projectors, DVD players, set-top boxes, and other video components. Until now,
several separate video and audio cables have been required to connect AV components. With HDMI, a single cable can
carry control signals, digital video, and up to eight channels of digital audio (2-channel PCM, multichannel digital
audio, or multichannel PCM).
*1
The HDMI video stream (i.e., video signal) is compatible with DVI (Digital Visual Interface), so TVs and displays
with a DVI input can be connected by using an HDMI-to-DVI adapter cable. (This may not work with some TVs and
displays, resulting in no picture.)
The AV controller uses HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection), so only HDCP-compatible components
will display a picture.
The AV controller’s HDMI interface is based on the following standard:
High-Definition Multimedia Interface Specification Informational Version 1.3a
Supported Audio Formats
• 2-channel linear PCM (32–192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit)
• Multichannel linear PCM (7.1 ch, 32–192 kHz)
• Bitstream (DSD, Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD, DTS, DTS-HD High Resolution, DTS-HD Mas-
ter Audio)
Your DVD player must be able to output these formats from its HDMI OUT.
About Copyright Protection
*2
The AV controller supports HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection), a copy-protection system for digital
video signals. Other devices connected to the AV controller via HDMI must also support HDCP.
Use a commercially available HDMI cable (supplied with some components) to connect the AV controller’s HDMI OUT
MAIN or HDMI OUT SUB to the HDMI input on your TV or projector.
*1 DVI (Digital Visual Interface): The digital display interface standard set by the DDWG*3 in 1999.
*2 HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection): The video encryption technology developed by Intel for HDMI/DVI. It’s designed to
protect video content and requires a HDCP-compatible device to display the encrypted video.
*3 DDWG (Digital Display Working Group): Lead by Intel, Compaq, Fujitsu, Hewlett Packard, IBM, NEC, and Silicon Image, this open
industry group’s objective is to address the industry's requirements for a digital connectivity specification for high-performance PCs and
digital displays.
35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ConnectingYour Components—Continued
Making HDMI Connections
Step 1: Use HDMI cables to connect the AV controller’s HDMI jacks to your HDMI-compatible DVD player, TV,
projector, and so on.
Step 2: Assign each HDMI IN to an input selector. See “HDMI Input Setup” on page 47.
■ Video Signals
Digital video signals received by the HDMI IN jacks are normally output by the HDMI OUT MAIN or HDMI OUT
SUB for display on your TV. Composite video, S-Video, and component video sources can be upconverted for the
HDMI outputs. See “Video Connection Formats” on page 27 for more information.
■ Audio Signals
Digital audio signals received by the HDMI IN jacks are output by the speakers and headphones connected to the AV
controller. Normally, they are not output by the HDMI outputs, unless the HDMI Audio Out setting is set to On (see
page 107).
To listen to audio received by the HDMI IN jacks through your TV’s speakers, set the HDMI Audio
Hint!
Out setting to On (see page 107), and set your DVD player’s HDMI audio output setting to PCM.
component so that its video can be seen on your TV (e.g., on your TV, select the input to which the
HDMI component is connected). If your TV is not turned on or a different input is selected, the AV
controller’s speakers may produce no sound or the sound may be cut off.
Note:
• When the HDMI Audio Out setting is set to On (see page 107), or TV Control is set to Enable and you’re listening
through your TV’s speakers, if you turn up the AV controller’s volume control, the sound will be output by the AV
controller’s speakers. To stop the AV controller’s speakers producing sound, change the settings, change your TV’s
settings, or turn down the AV controller’s volume.
HDMI
OUT
HDMI
IN
TV
DVD player
HDMI
HDMI
IN 1
OUT
MAIN
HDMI
ASSIGNABLE
OUT
OUT
SUB
IN 4
IN 3
IN 2
IN 1
XM
RS232
MAIN
MONITOR OUT
/ZONE OUT
2
ASSIGNABLE
COMPONENT VIDEO
SIRIUS
2
MONITOR
OUT
IN 3
IN 2
IN 1(DVD)
1
Y
MONITOR
OUT
DVD
AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT
VCR/DVR
IR
V
V
A
CB/PB
REMOTE
CONTROL
ZONE
OUT
2
IN
ASSIGNABLE
COAXIAL
DIGITAL
IN 1
(DVD)
CR/PR
S
FRONT CENTER
S
OUT
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
SURR SU
(VCR/DVR)
IN 2
IN 3
IN 1
IN 2
OUT
L
L
(CBL/SAT)
R
R
OPTICAL
SUBWOOFER
PHONO
CD
TAPE
AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT
VCR/DVR
DVD
MULTI CH
(GAME/TV)
(CD)
GND
BALANCE L
MONO
SURR BACK R
Bi-AMP
CENTER
BALANCE R
SURR R
FRONT R
FRONT L
2
1
3
HOT GND
COLD
INPUT
36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ConnectingYour Components—Continued
Connecting a Game Console
Step 1:Video Connection
Choose a video connection that matches your game console (
,
, or ), and then make the connection.
A
B
C
If you use connection , you must connect the AV controller to your TV with the same type of connection.
A
Step 2: Audio Connection
Choose an audio connection that matches your DVD player (
,
, or ), and then make the connection.
a
b
c
• With connection , you can listen to and record audio from your game console or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3.
a
• To enjoy Dolby Digital and DTS, use connection . (To record or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3 as well, use
b
a
and .)
b
Connection
AV controller
COMPONENT VIDEO IN 3
GAME/TV IN S
Signal flow
Game console
Component video output
S-Video output
Picture quality
Best
⇐
⇐
⇐
⇐
⇐
A
B
C
a
Better
GAME/TV IN V
Composite video output
Analog audio L/R output
Digital coaxial output
Standard
GAME/TV IN L/R
DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 1
b
HDMI
ASSIGNABLE
OUT
OUT
SUB
IN 4
IN 3
IN 2
IN 1
XM
RS232
MAIN
MONITOR OUT
/ZONE OUT
2
ASSIGNABLE
COMPONENT VIDEO
SIRIUS
2
MONITOR
OUT
IN 3
IN 2
IN 1(DVD)
1
Y
C
MONITOR
OUT
DVD
AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT
VCR/DVR
V
V
A
IN
C
C
B/PB
REMOTE
ZONE
OUT
2
CONTROL
ASSIGNABLE
COAXIAL
DIGITAL
IN 1
(DVD)
R/PR
S
FRONT CENTER
S
OU
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
SURR
B
(VCR/DVR)
IN 2
IN 3
IN 1
IN 2
OUT
L
L
(CBL/SAT)
b
R
R
OPTICAL
SUBWOOFER
PHONO
CD
TAPE
AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT
VCR/DVR
DVD
MULTI
a
(GAME/TV)
(CD)
GND
2
BALANCE L
MONO
SURR BACK R
Bi-AMP
CENTER
BALANCE R
SURR R
FRONT R
FRONT
1
3
HOT GND
COLD
INPUT
A
L
R
OPTICAL
OUT
Y
PB
PR
AUDIO
OUT
S VIDEO
OUT
VIDEO
OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
Game Console
37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ConnectingYour Components—Continued
Connecting a Camcorder or Other AV Component
Step 1:Video Connection
Choose a video connection that matches your camcorder ( or ), and then make the connection.
A
B
Step 2: Audio Connection
Choose an audio connection that matches your camcorder ( or ), and then make the connection.
a
b
MASTER VOLUME
INPUT
b
a
DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
GAME/TV
AUX
1
AUX
2
TAPE
TUNER
CD
PHONO
DISPLAY
PUSH TO OPEN
DIGITAL
TUNING
PRESET
RETURN
LEVEL
TONE
HDMI OUT
STEREO
THX
SETUP MIC
AUX
2
L
INPUT
TUNING
DIMMER MEMORY MODE
SETUP
CLEAR
VIDEO
AUDIO
R
DIGITAL INPUT
LISTENING MODE
S
VIDEO
DIGITAL
ENTER
TUNING
L
AUDIO
INPUT
R
INPUT
VIDEO
INPUT
S VIDEO
A
B
VIDEO
OUT
L
AUDIO
OUT
R
S VIDEO
OUT
OPTICAL
OUT
Camcorder, etc.
Connection
AV controller
Signal flow
Camcorder
AUX 2 Input S Video
AUX 2 Input Video
AUX 2 Input L/R
S-Video output
⇐
⇐
⇐
⇐
A
B
a
Composite video output
Analog audio L/R output
Digital optical output
AUX 2 Input Digital
b
38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ConnectingYour Components—Continued
Connecting a CD Player
Step 1:
Choose a connection that matches your CD player (
,
, or ), and then make the connection.
a
b
c
HDMI
ASSIGNABLE
OUT
OUT
SUB
RS232
IN
4
IN
3
IN
2
IN
XM
1
MAIN
a
MONITOR OUT
/ZONE OUT
2
ASSIGNABLE
COMPONENT VIDEO
SIRIUS
2
MONITOR
OUT
IN
3
IN
2
IN 1(DVD)
1
Y
MONITOR
OUT
AUX
1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT
VCR/DVR
DVD
IR
COAXIAL
IN 2
V
b
c
V
A
IN
B
C
IN
REMOTE
C
B/PB
ZONE
OUT
2
CONTROL
ASSIGNABLE
COAXIAL
DIGITAL
IN
1
(DVD)
L
CR/PR
S
FRONT CENTER
OUT
SURR
S
A
B
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
(VCR/DVR)
IN
IN
IN
IN
2
3
1
2
L
L
R
(CBL/SAT)
R
R
OPTICAL
SUBWOOFER
PHONO
CD
TAPE
AUX
1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT
R
VCR/DVR
FRONT
DVD
MULTI CH
CD
(GAME/TV)
(CD)
GND
2
BALANCE
MONO
L
OPTICAL
IN 2
SURR BACK
Bi-AMP
BALANCE
R
SURR
R
R
CENTER
FRONT
L
SURR
1
3
OUT
HOT GND
COLD
INPUT
L
R
COAXIAL
OUT
OPTICAL
OUT
AUDIO
OUT
Connect one or the other
CD player
• With connection , you can listen to and record audio from the CD player or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3.
a
• To connect the CD player digitally, use connection or . (To record or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3 as well,
b
c
use and , or and .)
a
b
a
c
Connection
AV controller
Signal flow
CD
CD IN L/R
Analog audio L/R output
Digital coaxial output
Digital optical output
⇐
⇐
⇐
a
b
c
DIGITAL COAXIAL IN 2
DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 2
Connecting a Turntable
The AV controller’s PHONO IN is designed for use with
a moving magnet (MM) type cartridge.
HDMI
ASSIGNABLE
OUT
OUT
SUB
RS232
IN
4
IN
3
IN
2
IN
XM
1
MAIN
Use an analog audio cable to connect the AV controller’s
PHONO IN L/R jacks to the audio output on your turn-
table.
MONITOR OUT
/ZONE OUT
2
ASSIGNABLE
MONITOR
OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN IN IN 1(DVD)
2
SIRIUS
3
2
1
Y
MONITOR
OUT
AUX
1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT
VCR/DVR
DVD
IR
V
V
A
IN
B
REMOTE
C
B/PB
ZONE
OUT
2
CONTROL
ASSIGNABLE
COAXIAL
DIGITAL
IN
1
(DVD)
C
R/PR
S
FRONT CENTER
OUT
SURR SURR BACK
S
A
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
Notes:
(VCR/DVR)
IN
IN
IN
IN
2
3
1
2
L
L
(CBL/SAT)
R
R
• If your turntable has a ground wire, connect it to the
AV controller’s GND screw. With some turntables,
connecting the ground wire may produce an audible
hum. If this happens, disconnect it.
OPTICAL
SUBWOOFER
PHONO
CD
TAPE
GAME/TV CBL/SAT
R
VCR/DVR
T
DVD
MULTI CH
(GAME/TV)
(CD)
GND
2
BALANCE
MONO
L
SURR BACK
Bi-AMP
IN
BALANCE
R
SURR
R
R
CENTER
1
3
OUT
HOT GND
COLD
L
INPUT
R
• If your turntable has a moving coil (MC) type car-
tridge, you’ll need a commercially available MC head
amp or MC transformer. Connect your turntable to the
head amp or transformer, and connect that to the AV
controller’s PHONO IN L/R jacks.
PHONO
AUDIO
OUTPUT
L
• You can also use a phono equalizer to connect a turn-
table with an MC-type cartridge. See your phono
equalizer’s manual for details.
R
39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ConnectingYour Components—Continued
Connecting a Cassette, CDR, MiniDisc, or DAT Recorder
Step 1:
Choose a connection that matches your recorder (
,
,
, or ), and then make the connection.
a
b
c
d
IN
a
COAXIAL
b
HDMI
ASSIGNABLE
L
OUT
OUT
SUB
IN
4
IN
3
IN
2
IN
XM
1
IN 2
RS232
MAIN
MONITOR OUT
/ZONE OUT
2
ASSIGNABLE
MONITOR
OUT
SIRIUS
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN IN IN 1(DVD)
2
3
2
1
R
Y
MONITOR
OUT
AUX
1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT
VCR/DVR
DVD
IR
V
V
A
B
C
REMOTE
C
C
B/PB
NE
OUT
2
IN
CONTROL
TAPE
ASSIGNABLE
COAXIAL
DIGITAL
IN
1
c
(DVD)
OPTICAL
IN 2
R/PR
S
FRONT CENTER
OUT
SURR SURR BACK F
S
A
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
(VCR/DVR)
IN
IN
IN
IN
2
3
1
2
L
L
a
(CBL/SAT)
R
R
L
OPTICAL
SUBWOOFER
PHONO
CD
TAPE
AUX
1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT
R
VCR/DVR
FONT
DVD
MULTI CH
(GAME/TV)
(CD)
GND
2
BALANCE
MONO
L
SURR BACK
Bi-AMP
BALANCE
R
SURR
R
R
CENTER
FRONT
L
SU
R
1
OPTICAL
d
3
OUT
HOT GND
COLD
TAPE
INPUT
L
R
L
R
Connect one
or the other
COAXIAL
OUT
OPTICAL
OUT
OPTICAL
IN
AUDIO
IN
AUDIO
OUT
Cassette, CDR, MD, etc.
• With connection , you can play and record or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3.
a
• To connect the recorder digitally for playback, use connections and , or and
.
a
b
a
c
• To connect the recorder digitally for recording, use connection
.
d
Connection
a
AV controller
Signal flow
Cassette, CDR, MD, or DAT recorder
⇐
⇒
TAPE IN L/R
TAPE OUT L/R
Analog audio L/R output
Analog audio L/R input
DIGITAL COAXIAL IN 2
DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 2
DIGITAL OPTICAL OUT
Digital coaxial output
Digital optical output
Digital optical input
⇐
⇐
⇒
b
c
d
Connecting a Balanced Audio Source
You can connect a balanced audio source to the AV controller’s BALANCE L/R XLR jacks by using two XLR audio
cables. To use the balanced input, you must assign it to an input selector (see page 51). If you connect a mono source,
use the BALANCE L XLR jack and set the Balance Input setting to Mono (see page 51). The AV controller’s balanced
INPUT XLR jacks are wired as shown.
2
1
3
HDMI
ASSIGNABLE
Stereo audio source with
balanced XLR output
OUT
OUT
SUB
RS232
IN
4
IN
3
IN
2
IN
XM
1
MAIN
HOT GND
COLD
MONITOR OUT
/ZONE OUT
2
ASSIGNABLE
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN IN IN 1(DVD)
SIRIUS
2
MONITOR
OUT
3
2
1
Y
MONITOR
OUT
AUX
1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT
VCR/DVR
DVD
IR
V
V
A
IN
B
C
REMOTE
CONTROL
C
B/PB
ZONE
OUT
2
2
ASSIGNABLE
COAXIAL
DIGITAL
IN
1
(DVD)
CR/PR
S
FRONT CENTER
OUT
SURR SURR BACK FR
BALANCE
MONO
L
S
A
BALANCE
R
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
(VCR/DVR)
IN
IN
IN
2
3
2
L
L
2
1
3
(CBL/SAT)
R
R
OPTICAL
HOT GND
COLD
SUBWOOFER
MULTI CH
PHONO
CD
TAPE
AUX
1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT
R
VCR/DVR
FRONT
DVD
(AME/TV)
(CD)
GND
BALANCE
MONO
L
SURR BACK
Bi-AMP
BALANCE
R
SURR
R
R
CENTER
FRONT
L
SUR
INPUT
2
1
3
OUT
HOT GND
COLD
INPUT
40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ConnectingYour Components—Continued
Connecting an RI Dock
■ IfYour iPod Supports Video:
■ IfYour iPod Doesn’t Support Video:
Connect your RI Dock’s audio output jacks to the
AV controller’s GAME/TV IN L/R jacks, and con-
nect its video output jack to the AV controller’s
GAME/TV IN V jack.
Connect your RI Dock’s audio output jacks to the
AV controller’s GAME/TV IN L/R jacks.
(Onkyo DS-A2 hookup shown below.)
(Onkyo DS-A2 hookup shown below.)
IN
HDMI
ASSIGNABLE
L
RS232
IN
4
IN
3
IN
2
IN
XM
1
MONITOR OUT
/ZONE OUT
2
ASSIGNABLE
MONITOR
OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN IN IN 1(DVD)
SIRIUS
2
3
2
1
R
GAME/TV
HDMI
Y
ASSIGNABLE
AUX
1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT
IN
4
IN
3
IN
2
I
RS232
V
V
REMOTE
B/PB
XM
GAME/TV
CONTROL
ASSIGNABLE
COAXIAL
MONITOR OUT
/ZONE OUT
2
DIGITAL
ASSIGNABLE
MONITOR
OUT
SIRIUS
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN IN 1(DVD)
2
3
2
IN
1
1
(DVD)
CR/PR
S
Y
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
IN
IN
U
AUX
1
GAME/TV CBL/SA
(VCR/DVR)
IN
IN
IN
IN
2
3
1
2
V
L
L
REMOTE
CONTROL
CB/PB
ASSIGNABLE
COAXIAL
DIGITAL
(CBL/SAT)
IN
R
R
IN
1
(DVD)
CR/PR
OPTICAL
PHONO
S
CD
TAPE
AUX
1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT
R
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
IN
IN
(GAME/TV)
(CD)
L
(VCR/DVR)
GND
2
BALANCE
MONO
L
IN
IN
IN
IN
2
3
1
2
SURR BACK
Bi-AMP
BALANCE
R
SURR
R
L
L
1
(CBL/SAT)
3
R
R
OUT
OPTICAL
R
HOT GND
COLD
PHONO
CD
TAPE
AUX
1
GAME/TV CBL/SA
R
(GAME/TV)
(CD)
INPUT
GND
2
BALANCE
MONO
L
SURR BACK
Bi-AMP
BALANCE
R
SURR
R
GAME/TV
1
3
OUT
HOT GND
COLD
INPUT
• Connect its video output jack to the AV controller’s
GAME/TV IN S jack.
• Enter the appropriate remote control code before
using the AV controller’s remote controller for the first
time (see page 116).
Notes:
• Connect the RI Dock to the AV controller with an
cable (see page 42).
• Set the RI Dock’s RI MODE switch to HDD or HDD/DOCK.
• Set the AV controller’s Input Display to DOCK (see page 49).
• See the RI Dock’s instruction manual for more information.
Connecting the Power Cords of Other Components
The AV controller has AC outlets on its rear panel that can be used to
connect the power cords of other components that you intend to use with
the AV controller. These components can then be left turned on so that
they turn on and off as and when the AV controller is set to On or
Standby.
AC INLET
AC OUTLET
AC 120V 60Hz
SWITCHED
120W 1A MAX.
Caution:
• Make sure that the total capacity of the components that you connect
to theAC OUTLETS does not exceed the stated capacity (e.g., TOTAL
120 W).
Note:
• When the HDMI Control setting is set to Enable (page 107), the AC
outlets are on all the time regardless of whether the AV controller is
set to On or Standby, or Ready mode in this case, so any components
connected to them cannot be turned on or off automatically.
AC OUTLET
AC 120V 60Hz
SWITCHED
120W 1A MAX.
• Onkyo components connected via
controller.
should be connected directly to a wall outlet, not an AC OUTLET on the AV
41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ConnectingYour Components—Continued
Connecting Onkyo
Components
Step 1: Make sure that each Onkyo component is connected to the AV controller with an analog audio cable (RCA).
Step 2: Make the necessary connections (see illustration below).
Step 3: If you’re using an MD, CDR, or RI DOCK component, change the Input Display (see page 49).
With
(Remote Interactive), you can use the following special functions:
Auto Power On/Standby
When you start playback on a component connected via
turn on and select that component as the input source. Similarly, when the AV controller is set to Standby, all compo-
nents connected via will also go on Standby. This function will not work with components that are connected to an
, if the AV controller is on Standby, it will automatically
AC OUTLET on the AV controller.
Direct Change
When playback is started on a component connected via
, the AV controller automatically selects that component as
the input source. If your DVD player is connected to the AV controller’s multichannel input, you’ll need to press the
[AUDIO SEL] button repeatedly and select Multich to hear all channels (see page 78), as the Direct Change
tion selects the DVD IN L/R jacks.
func-
Remote Control
You can use the AV controller’s remote controller to control your other
-capable Onkyo components.You must enter
the appropriate remote control code first (see page 117). And remember to point the remote controller at the AV control-
ler and not the other component.
Notes:
IN
• Use only
are supplied with Onkyo players (DVD, CD, etc.).
• Some components have two jacks. You can con-
nect either one to the AV controller. The other jack is
for connecting additional -capable components.
• Connect only Onkyo components to jacks. Con-
cables for
connections.
cables
L
R
HDMI
ASSIGNABLE
OUT
OUT
SUB
RS232
IN
4
IN
3
IN
2
IN
XM
1
MAIN
CD
MONITOR OUT
/ZONE OUT
2
ASSIGNABLE
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN IN IN 1(DVD)
2
SIRIUS
MONITOR
OUT
3
2
1
Y
MONITOR
OUT
AUX
1
GAME/TV CBL/SA
T
VCR/DVR
DVD
IR
V
V
A
IN
B
C
REMOTE
C
C
B/PB
ZONE
OUT
2
CONTROL
I
DIGITAL ASSIGNABLE
COAXIAL
IN
1
(DVD)
R/PR
FRONT
S
S
FRONT CENTER
OUT
A
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
SURR SURR BACK F
IN
IN
IN
IN
2
3
1
2
(VCR/DVR)
L
L
L
(CBL/SAT)
R
R
OPTICAL
SUBWOOFER
PHONO
CD
TAPE
AUX
1
GAME/TV CBL/SA
T
VCR/DVR
FRONT
DVD
MULTI CH
(GAME/TV)
(CD)
REMOTE
CONTROL
GND
2
BALANCE
MONO
L
SURR BACK
Bi-AMP
R
BALANCE
R
SURR
R
R
CENTER
FRONT
L
SUR
1
R
3
OUT
HOT GND
COLD
INPUT
necting other manufacturer’s components may cause
a malfunction.
DVD
• Some components may not support all
functions.
e.g., CD player
Refer to the manuals supplied with your other Onkyo
components.
R
L
ANALOG
AUDIO OUT
• While Zone 2 or Zone 3 is on, the Auto Power
e.g., DVD player
On/Standby and Direct Change
work.
functions do not
R
L
ANALOG
AUDIO OUT
Connecting the Power Cord
• Before connecting the power cord, connect all your speakers and AV components.
• Connect the power cord to the AV controller’s AC INLET.
• Plug the other end of the power cord into a suitable wall outlet.
• Turning on the AV controller may cause a momentary power surge that might interfere with other electrical equipment
on the same circuit. If this is a problem, plug the AV controller into a different branch circuit.
42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turning On the AV Controller
STANDBY/ON
STANDBY
ON
STANDBY indicator
ON
STANDBY
TV
INPUT
MASTER VOLUME
DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
3
+
TV CH
-
1
GAME/TV
4
2
AUX1
5
STANDBY/ON
AUX
6
2
STANDBY
ZONE
ZONE
2
3
TAPE
7
TUNER
8
CD
9
PURE AUDIO
AUDIO SEL
DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
GAME/TV
AUX
1
AUX
2
TAPE
TUNER
CD
PHONO
DISPLAY
PUSH TO OPEN
TV VOL
PHONO
D. TUN
TUNING
PRESET
RETURN
ZONE
ZONE
2
3
OFF
LEVEL
TONE
HDMI OUT
STEREO
THX
+10
-- --- 10
/
INPUT SELECTOR
MACRO
CLEAR
12
SETUP MIC
AUX
2
L
INPUT
0
TUNING
PHONES
POWER
RT/PTY/TP MEMORY MODE
SETUP
11
CLEAR
ON
OFF
DIGITAL INPUT
LISTENING MODE
S
VIDEO
VIDEO
AUDIO
R
DIGITAL
ENTER
TUNING
ZONE
ZONE
3
2
1
2
3
REMOTE MODE
DVD
VCR
CD
CDR/MD
RECEIVER
POWER
CABLE
DOCK
RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
Turning On and Standby
On the AV controller, press the [STANDBY/ON] button.
Remote
AV controller
controller
On the remote controller, press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE MODE button,
followed by the [ON] button.
The AV controller comes on, the display lights up, and the STANDBY indicator goes
off.
STANDBY/ON
RECEIVER
or
Pressing the remote controller’s [ON] button again will turn on any components con-
ON
nected via
.
To turn the AV controller off, press the [STANDBY/ON] button, or press the remote
controller’s [STANDBY] button. The AV controller will enter Standby mode. To pre-
vent any loud surprises the next time you turn on the AV controller, turn down the
volume before you turn it off.
To get your system up and running with the minimum of fuss, here’s a few pointers to help you configure the AV
controller before you use it for the very first time. These settings only need to be made once.
■ Do the automatic speaker setup—this is essential!
See “Automatic Speaker Setup (Audyssey MultEQ XT)” on page 52.
If you did, see “HDMI Monitor Setup” on page 45.
■ Did you connect a component to an HDMI input,
Y
HDMI
component video input, or digital audio input?
COAXIAL
PB
Input Setup” on page 48, or “Digital Input Setup” on page 49 respec-
PR
OPTICAL
tively.
■ Did you connect an Onkyo MD recorder, CD recorder, or RI
OUT
IN
Dock?
If you did, see “Changing the Input Display” on page 49.
TAPE
MD recorder, CD recorder,
RI Dock
43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
First Time Setup
This section explains the settings that you need to make before using the AV controller for the very first time.
Speaker Settings
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
]
3
buttons to select“1. Speaker Set-
tings,” and then press [ENTER].
The Speaker Settings menu appears.
If you change these settings, you must run the auto-
ENTER
matic speaker setup again (see page 52).
2-1.Speaker Settings
Speakers Type
Normal
ZONE
2
1
2
REMOTE MODE
DVD
VCR
CD
CDR/MD
ENTER
TV
CABLE
SAT
DOCK
RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
1
DIMMER
2, 3
1, 6
2–5
+
CH
ENTER
VOL
DISC
ALBUM
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select“SpeakerType,”
and use the Left and Right
]
-
4
5
PREV
CH
DISPLAY
MUTING
ENTER
[
]/[ ] buttons to select:
Normal: Select this if you’ve con-
nected your front speakers
normally.
Bi-Amp:Select this if you’ve con-
nected your front speakers for
bi-amped operation.
RANDOM
If you’ve fed your front speakers from the FRONT L/R
and SURR BACK L/R outputs for bi-amping, you must
change the Speaker Type setting. For hookup informa-
tion, see “Bi-amping the Front Speakers” on page 23.
Notes:
• When bi-amping is used, the AV controller is able to
feed up to 5.1 speakers in the main room.
Press the [SETUP] button.
Setup closes.
• Before you change these settings, turn down the vol-
ume.
Press the [RECEIVER] button,
followed by the [SETUP] button.
1
Note:
RECEIVER
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV con-
troller by using its [SETUP], [ENTER], and arrow
buttons.
The main menu appears onscreen.
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select “2. Speaker
]
2
Setup,” and then press [ENTER].
ENTER
The Speaker Setup menu appears.
ENTER
44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
First Time Setup—Continued
HDMI Monitor Setup
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
]
2
3
4
buttons to select“1. Input/Output
Assign,” and then press
[ENTER].
The Input/Output Assign menu
appears.
ENTER
ON
STANDBY
TV
INPUT
DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
3
+
TV CH
-
1
GAME/TV
4
2
AUX1
5
AUX
6
2
ENTER
TAPE
7
TUNER
8
CD
9
TV VOL
PHONO
D. TUN
+10
-- --- 10
/
CLEAR
0
11
12
INPUT SELECTOR
MACRO
ZONE
ZONE
3
2
1
2
3
REMOTE MODE
DVD
VCR
CD
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select “1. Monitor
Out,” and then press [ENTER].
]
CDR/MD
TV
CABLE
SAT
DOCK
RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
1
DIMMER
ENTER
The Monitor Out menu appears.
2, 3
1, 6
2–5
+
CH
1-1.Monitor Out
ENTER
VOL
DISC
ALBUM
HDMI Monitor
Resolution
Main
-
PREV
CH
Monitor Out2
DISPLAY
MUTING
ENTER
REC
PLAYLIST
RANDOM
ING MODE
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select“HDMI Monitor,”
and use the Left and Right
]
If you connect your TV to the COMPONENT VIDEO
MONITOR OUT 1 or COMPONENT VIDEO MON-
ITOR OUT 2/ZONE 2 OUT, set the HDMI Monitor set-
ting to No so that the onscreen setup menus are displayed
and composite video and S-Video sources are upcon-
verted and output by the COMPONENT VIDEO MON-
ITOR OUT 1 and COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR
OUT 2/ZONE 2 OUT.
ENTER
[
]/[ ] buttons to select:
No: Select this if your TV is con-
nected to the COMPONENT
VIDEO MONITOR OUT 1,
COMPONENT VIDEO
MONITOR OUT 2/ZONE 2
OUT, S MONITOR OUT, or
V MONITOR OUT.
ENTER
If you connect your TV to the HDMI OUT MAIN or
HDMI OUT SUB, set the HDMI Monitor setting to
Main or Sub, respectively, so that the onscreen setup
menus are displayed and composite video, S-Video, and
component video sources are upconverted and output by
the HDMI OUT MAIN or HDMI OUT SUB.
Main: Select this if your TV is con-
nected to the HDMI OUT
MAIN.
Sub: Select this if your TV is con-
nected to the HDMI OUT
SUB.
You can specify the output resolution for the HDMI out-
puts and COMPONENT VIDEO outputs and have the
AV controller upconvert the picture resolution as neces-
sary to match the resolution supported by your TV.
Note:
• When Main or Sub is selected, the
onscreen setup menus are output by
only the HDMI outputs. If you’re
not using the HDMI outputs and
select Main or Sub by mistake and
the menus disappear, press the AV
controller’s [HDMI OUT] button
so that “HDMI Monitor: No”
appears on the display.
Press the [RECEIVER] button,
followed by the [SETUP] button.
1
RECEIVER
The main menu appears onscreen.
45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
First Time Setup—Continued
• See page 27 for charts showing how the HDMI Moni-
tor setting affects the video signal flow through the AV
controller.
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select “Resolution,”
and use the Left and Right
]
5
ENTER
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV con-
troller by using its [SETUP], [ENTER], and arrow
buttons.
[
]/[ ] buttons to select:
Through:Select this to pass video
through the AV controller at
the same resolution and with
no conversion.
Auto: Select this to have the AV
controller automatically con-
vert video at resolutions not
supported by your TV. (Not
available when the HDMI
Monitor setting is set to No.)
480p: Select this for 480p output
and video conversion as nec-
essary.
Using the HDMI OUT Button
The HDMI Monitor setting can also be set to No, Main,
or Sub by using the [HDMI OUT] button on the AV con-
troller.
ENTER
1, 2
MASTER VOLUME
STANDBY/ON
STANDBY
ZONE
ZONE
2
3
720p: Select this for 720p output
and video conversion as nec-
essary.
PURE AUDIO
AUDIO SEL
DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
GAME/TV
AUX
1
AUX
2
TAPE
TUNER
CD
PHONO
DISPLAY
PUSH TO OPEN
TUNING
PRESET
RETURN
ZONE
ZONE
2
3
OFF
LEVEL
TONE
HDMI OUT
STEREO
THX
SETUP MIC
AUX
2
L
INPUT
TUNING
PHONES
POWER
RT/PTY/TP MEMORY MODE
SETUP
CLEAR
ON
OFF
DIGITAL INPUT
LISTENING MODE
S
VIDEO
VIDEO
AUDIO
R
DIGITAL
ENTER
TUNING
1080i: Select this for 1080i output
and video conversion as nec-
essary.
1080p: Select this for 1080p output
and video conversion as nec-
essary. (Not available when
the HDMI Monitor setting is
set to No.)
Press the [HDMI OUT] button.
The current setting is displayed.
1
HDMI OUT
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select “Monitor Out2,”
and use the Left and Right
]
6
Press the [HDMI OUT] button
repeatedly to select:
No: Select this if your TV is con-
nected to the COMPONENT
VIDEO MONITOR OUT, S
MONITOR OUT, or V MON-
ITOR OUT.
Main: Select this if your TV is con-
nected to the HDMI OUT
MAIN.
2
ENTER
HDMI OUT
[
]/[ ] buttons to select:
Monitor:Select this if you’ve con-
nected the COMPONENT
VIDEO MONITOR
OUT 2/ZONE 2 OUT to a TV
or other component in your
main room.
ENTER
Zone 2: Select this if you’ve con-
nected the COMPONENT
VIDEO MONITOR
Sub: Select this if your TV is con-
nected to the HDMI OUT
SUB.
OUT 2/ZONE 2 OUT to a TV
in Zone 2.
Note:
When Monitor is selected, the COM-
PONENT VIDEO MONITOR
OUT 2/ZONE 2 OUT outputs the same
video as the COMPONENT VIDEO
MONITOR OUT 1.
• When Main or Sub is selected, the
onscreen setup menus are output by
only the HDMI outputs. If you’re
not using the HDMI outputs and
select Main or Sub by mistake and
the menus disappear, press the
[HDMI OUT] button to select No.
Notes:
• If the video source contains information that restricts
output at high-resolutions, 720p or 1080i content will
not be converted.
46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
First Time Setup—Continued
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select“2. HDMI Input,”
and then press [ENTER].
]
HDMI Input Setup
3
4
ZONE
2
1
REMOTE
ENTER
DVD
VCR
CD
The HDMI Input menu appears.
CDR/MD
TV
CABLE
SAT
DOCK
RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
1
1-2.HDMI Input
DIMMER
DVD
---
---
---
---
---
---
2, 3
1, 5
2–4
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
GAME/TV
AUX1
+
CH
ENTER
ENTER
VOL
DISC
ALBUM
-
AUX2
PREV
CH
DISPLAY
MUTING
If you connect a video component to an HDMI IN, you
must assign that input to an input selector. For example,
if you connect your DVD player to HDMI IN 1, you
must assign HDMI IN 1 to the DVD input selector.
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select an input selec-
tor, and use the Left and Right
]
ENTER
[
]/[ ] buttons to select:
IN1: Select if the video component
is connected to HDMI IN 1.
IN2: Select if the video component
is connected to HDMI IN 2.
IN3: Select if the video component
is connected to HDMI IN 3.
IN4: Select if the video component
is connected to HDMI IN 4.
- - -: Select this to upconvert and
output composite video,
By default, none of the HDMI inputs are assigned. The
following input selectors can be assigned: DVD,
VCR/DVR, CBL/SAT, GAME/TV, AUX 1, AUX 2.
If you’ve connected your TV to the AV controller with an
HDMI cable, you can set the AV controller so that com-
posite video, S-Video, and component video sources are
ENTER
upconverted ( ) and output by the HDMI outputs. You
*
can set this for each input selector by selecting the
“- - -” option.
Composite video, S-Video,
S-Video, and component
component video
HDMI
video sources from the HDMI
OUT.
IN
( )
*
Press the [SETUP] button.
Setup closes.
5
OUT
Composite video, S-Video,
component video
HDMI
Press the [RECEIVER] button,
followed by the [SETUP] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
1
Notes:
RECEIVER
input selector.
• For composite video, S-Video, and component
video upconversion for the HDMI OUT MAIN or
HDMI OUT SUB, the HDMI Monitor setting must
be set to Main or Sub (see page 45). See page 27 for
sion.
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
]
2
buttons to select“1. Input/Output
Assign,” and then press
[ENTER].
The Input/Output Assign menu
appears.
• When an HDMI IN is assigned to an input selector as
explained here, the digital audio input for that input
selector is automatically set to the same HDMI IN.
See “Digital Input Setup” on page 49.
ENTER
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV con-
troller by using its [SETUP], [ENTER], and arrow
buttons.
ENTER
47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
First Time Setup—Continued
Component Video Input Setup
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
]
3
buttons to select “3. Component
Video Input,” and then press
[ENTER].
INPUT SELECTOR
M
1
2
ENTER
REMOTE MODE
DVD
VCR
CD
ZONE
2
CDR/MD
The Component Video Input menu
appears.
TV
CABLE
SAT
DOCK
RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
1
DIMMER
1-3.Component Video Input
2, 3
1, 5
2–4
+
DVD
IN1
---
---
---
---
---
ENTER
CH
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
GAME/TV
AUX1
ENTER
VOL
DISC
ALBUM
-
PREV
CH
AUX2
DISPLAY
MUTING
If you connect a video component to a COMPONENT
VIDEO IN, you must assign that input to an input
selector. For example, if you connect your DVD player
to COMPONENT VIDEO IN 3, you must assign COM-
PONENT VIDEO IN 3 to the DVD input selector.
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select an input selec-
tor, and use the Left and Right
]
4
ENTER
[
]/[ ] buttons to select:
IN1: Select if the video component
is connected to COMPO-
NENT VIDEO IN 1.
By default, the DVD input selector is assigned to COM-
PONENT VIDEO IN 1, and all of the other input selec-
tors (i.e., VCR/DVR, CBL/SAT, GAME/TV, AUX 1,
AUX 2, TAPE, CD, PHONO) are assigned to the “- - -”
option.
IN2: Select if the video component
is connected to COMPO-
NENT VIDEO IN 2.
IN3: Select if the video component
is connected to COMPO-
NENT VIDEO IN 3.
- - -: Select to output composite
video and S-Video sources
from the COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT.
ENTER
If you’ve connected your TV to the AV controller with a
component video cable, you can set the AV controller so
that composite video and S-Video sources are upcon-
verted ( ) and output by the COMPONENT VIDEO
*
MONITOR OUT 1 or 2. You can set this for each input
selector by selecting the “- - -” option.
Composite video, S-Video
IN
Component video
( )
Press the [SETUP] button.
Setup closes.
*
5
OUT
Composite video, S-Video
Component video
Notes:
Press the [RECEIVER] button,
followed by the [SETUP] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
RECEIVER
1
• For composite video and S-Video upconversion for
the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT 1 or
2, the HDMI Monitor setting must be set to Main
or Sub (see page 45). See page 27 for more informa-
tion on video signal flow and upconversion.
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV con-
troller by using its [SETUP], [ENTER], and arrow
buttons.
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select“1. Input/Output
Assign,”and then press [ENTER].
]
2
ENTER
The Input/Output Assign menu
appears.
ENTER
48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
First Time Setup—Continued
Changing the Input Display
Digital Input Setup
If you connect an
-capable Onkyo MiniDisc
IN
MACRO
recorder, CD recorder, or RI Dock to the TAPE IN/OUT
jacks, or connect an RI Dock to the GAME/TV jacks, for
to work properly, you must change this setting.
ZONE
2
1
2
3
REMOTE MODE
DVD
VCR
CD
CDR/MD
TV
CABLE
SAT
DOCK
RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
1
This setting can only be changed on the AV controller.
DIMMER
2, 3
1, 5
2–4
+
1, 2
1, 2
CH
ENTER
VOL
DISC
ALBUM
MASTER VOLUME
-
STANDBY/ON
PREV
CH
STANDBY
DISPLAY
MUTING
ZONE
2
3
ZONE
PURE AUDIO
AUDIO SEL
DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
GAME/TV
AUX
1
AUX
2
TAPE
TUNER
CD
PHONO
DISPLAY
PUSH TO OPEN
TUNING
PRESET
RETURN
ZONE
ZONE
2
3
OFF
LEVEL
TONE
HDMI OUT
STEREO
THX
SETUP MIC
AUX
2
L
INPUT
TUNING
PHONES
POWER
RT/PTY/TP MEMORY MODE
SETUP
IST
RANDOM
CLEAR
ON
OFF
DIGITAL INPUT
LISTENING MODE
S
VIDEO
VIDEO
AUDIO
R
DIGITAL
ENTER
TUNING
If you connect a component to a digital audio input, you
must assign that input to an input selector. For example,
if you connect your CD player to OPTICAL IN 2, you
must assign OPTICAL IN 2 to the CD input selector.
Press the [TAPE] or [GAME/TV]
input selector button so that
“TAPE” or “GAME/TV” appears
on the display.
1
These are the default assignments.
Input selector
DVD
Audio input
COAX1
COAX2
COAX3
OPT1
TAPE
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
GAME/TV
AUX 1
or
GAME/TV
- - -
AUX 2
FRONT (Fixed)
- - -
Press and hold down the [TAPE]
or [GAME/TV] input selector but-
ton (about 3 seconds) to change
the setting.
TAPE
2
TUNER
CD
- - -
OPT2
Repeat this step to select MD, CDR, or
DOCK.
PHONO
- - -
TAPE
or
For the Tape input selector, the setting
changes in this order:
Press the [RECEIVER] button,
followed by the [SETUP] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
1
RECEIVER
GAME/TV
TAPE → MD → CDR
→
DOCK
For the GAME/TV input selector, the
setting changes in this order:
GAME/TV ↔ DOCK
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
]
2
Note:
buttons to select“1. Input/Output
Assign,”and then press [ENTER].
The Input/Output Assign menu
appears.
• DOCK can be selected for the TAPE input selector or
GAME/TV input selector, but not both at the same
time.
ENTER
ENTER
49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
First Time Setup—Continued
Using the DIGITAL INPUT Button
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select “4. Digital
Input,” and then press [ENTER].
The Digital Input menu appears.
]
3
Digital inputs can also be assigned to input selectors by
using the [DIGITAL INPUT] button on the AV con-
troller.
ENTER
1-4.Digital Input
DVD
COAX1
COAX2
COAX3
OPT1
---
1
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
GAME/TV
AUX1
MASTER VOLUME
ENTER
STANDBY/ON
AUX2
TAPE
FRONT
---
STANDBY
ZONE
ZONE
2
3
TUNER
CD
PHONO
---
OPT2
---
PURE AUDIO
AUDIO SEL
DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
GAME/TV
AUX
1
AUX
2
TAPE
TUNER
CD
PHONO
DISPLAY
PUSH TO OPEN
TUNING
PRESET
RETURN
ZONE
ZONE
2
3
OFF
LEVEL
TONE
HDMI OUT
STEREO
THX
SETUP MIC
AUX
2
L
INPUT
TUNING
PHONES
POWER
RT/PTY/TP MEMORY MODE
SETUP
CLEAR
ON
OFF
DIGITAL INPUT
LISTENING MODE
S
VIDEO
VIDEO
AUDIO
R
DIGITAL
ENTER
TUNING
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
]
4
buttons to select an input selec-
tor, and then use the Left and
Right [ ]/[ ] buttons to select:
COAX1: Select if the component is
connected to DIGITAL
2, 3
ENTER
Press the input selector button
for the input selector that you
want to assign.
VCR/DVR CBL/SAT
1
COAXIAL IN 1.
COAX2: Select if the component is
connected to DIGITAL
DVD
ENTER
COAXIAL IN 2.
COAX3: Select if the component is
connected to DIGITAL
GAME/TV
TAPE
AUX 1
AUX 2
CD
TUNER
COAXIAL IN 3.
PHONO
OPT1: Select if the component is
connected to DIGITAL
OPTICAL IN 1.
OPT2: Select if the component is
connected to DIGITAL
Press the [DIGITAL INPUT]
button.
2
The current assignment is displayed.
OPTICAL IN 2.
- - -: Select if the component is
connected to an analog
DIGITAL INPUT
input.
Press the [DIGITAL INPUT] but-
ton repeatedly to select an
option.
Press the [SETUP] button.
Setup closes.
3
5
Available options are the same as for
the Digital Input menu. See step 4 on
page 50.
DIGITAL INPUT
Notes:
selector.
• The TUNER input selector cannot be assigned and is
fixed at the “- - -” option.
• When an HDMI IN is assigned to an input selector in
“HDMI Video Setup” on page 47, this input assign-
ment is automatically set to the same HDMI IN. And
in addition to the usual inputs (e.g., COAX1, COAX2,
etc.), you can also select HDMI inputs.
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV con-
troller by using its [SETUP], [ENTER], and arrow
buttons.
50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
First Time Setup—Continued
Analog Input Setup
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select “Multich,” and
use the Left and Right [ ]/[
buttons to select an input selec-
tor.
You can assign the multichannel input
to the following input selectors: DVD,
VCR/DVR, CBL/SAT, GAME/TV,
AUX 1, AUX 2, TAPE, CD, or
PHONO.
]
4
5
6
M
]
ZONE
2
1
2
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
REMOTE MODE
DVD
VCR
CD
CDR/MD
TV
CABLE
SAT
DOCK
RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
1
DIMMER
2, 3
1, 5
2–4
+
CH
ENTER
VOL
DISC
ALBUM
-
PREV
CH
DISPLAY
MUTING
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select “Balance,” and
use the Left and Right [ ]/[
]
]
If you connect a component to the AV controller’s analog
multichannel input, you must assign that input to an
input selector. For example, if you connect your DVD
player to the MULTI CH input, you must assign it to the
DVD input selector.
buttons to select an input selec-
tor.
You can assign the balanced input to the
following input selectors: DVD,
VCR/DVR, CBL/SAT, GAME/TV,
AUX 1, AUX 2, TAPE, CD, or
PHONO.
If you connect a component to the AV controller’s bal-
anced input, you must assign that input to an input
selector. For example, if you connect your CD player to
the BALANCED input, you must assign it to the CD
input selector.
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
]
buttons to select“Balance Input,”
and use the Left and Right
Press the [RECEIVER] button,
followed by the [SETUP] button.
1
[
]/[ ] buttons to select:
Stereo: Select if the source is stereo
and you’ve connected it to
the BALANCED L and R
INPUT XLR jacks.
RECEIVER
The main menu appears onscreen.
Mono: Select if the source is mono
and you’ve connected it to
the BALANCED L INPUT
XLR jack.
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
]
2
3
buttons to select“1. Input/Output
Assign,”and then press [ENTER].
The Input/Output Assign menu
appears.
Press the [SETUP] button.
Setup closes.
7
ENTER
Notes:
ENTER
• To listen to the component connected to the multi-
channel input, press the [AUDIO SEL] button repeat-
edly to select Multich (see page 78).
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select “5. Analog
Input,” and then press [ENTER].
]
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV con-
troller by using its [SETUP], [ENTER], and arrow
buttons.
ENTER
The Analog Input menu appears.
1-5.Analog Input
Multich
Balance
DVD
Balance Input
ENTER
51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
First Time Setup—Continued
Using Audyssey MultEQ XT
Automatic Speaker Setup
(Audyssey MultEQ XT)
Notes:
With the supplied speaker setup microphone, Audyssey
MultEQ XT can measure the number of speakers con-
nected, their sizes, crossover frequencies, and distances
from the listening position and calculate the optimal
speaker settings for you automatically.
• If the AV controller is muted, it will be unmuted
automatically when the automatic speaker setup
starts.
• Automatic speaker setup cannot be performed
while a pair of headphones is connected.
Before using this function, connect and position all of
your speakers.
• It takes about 15 minutes to complete the auto-
matic speaker setup for three positions. Total mea-
surement time varies depending on the number of
positions and speakers.
Measurement Positions
To create a listening environment in which several
people can enjoy your home theater simultaneously,
Audyssey MultEQ XT takes measurements at up to eight
positions within the listening area.
• Do not disconnect the speaker setup microphone
during the automatic speaker setup, unless you
want to cancel the setup.
• Do not connect or disconnect any speakers during
the automatic speaker setup.
■ 1st measurement position
This is the center position of your listening area, or
the listening position if there’s only one listener.
■ 2nd–8th measurement positions
These are the other listening positions (i.e., the
places where the other listeners will sit). You can
measure up to eight positions.
1
MASTER VOLUME
STANDBY/ON
STANDBY
ZONE
ZONE
2
3
The following examples show some typical home theater
seating arrangements. Choose the one that best matches
yours, and position the microphone accordingly when
prompted.
PURE AUDIO
AUDIO SEL
DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
GAME/TV
AUX
1
AUX
2
TAPE
TUNER
CD
PHONO
DISPLAY
PUSH TO OPEN
TUNING
PRESET
RETURN
ZONE
ZONE
2
3
OFF
LEVEL
TONE
HDMI OUT
STEREO
THX
SETUP MIC
AUX
2
L
INPUT
TUNING
PHONES
POWER
RT/PTY/TP MEMORY MODE
SETUP
CLEAR
ON
OFF
DIGITAL INPUT
LISTENING MODE
S
VIDEO
VIDEO
AUDIO
R
DIGITAL
ENTER
TUNING
TV
TV
TV
TV
TV
TV
TV
TV
TV
SETUP MIC
2, 9
ZONE
2
1
REMOTE
DVD
VCR
CD
CDR/MD
TV
CABLE
SAT
DOCK
RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
DIMMER
ENTER
,
+
CH
ENTER
VOL
DISC
ALBUM
-
PREV
CH
DISPLAY
MUTING
:
:
Listening area
Listening position
52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
First Time Setup—Continued
Turn on the AV controller and the
connected TV.
On the TV, select the input to which the
AV controller is connected.
The speaker detect results
appear.
1
2
4
AUDYSSEY
Auto Speaker Setup
-----SP Detect Result-----
FL : Yes
FR : Yes
SR : Yes
SBR : Yes
SW : Yes
SL : Yes
SBL : Yes
C : No
Place the setup microphone at
the 1st measurement position,
and connect it to the SETUP MIC
jack.
SETUP MIC
Next
Retry
Cancel
AUDYSSEY
Auto Speaker Setup
“Yes” means that the speaker was
detected. “No” means that no speaker
was detected.
Please place microphone at center
of listening area at ear height.
If you agree with the results, use
the Up and Down [ ]/[ ] but-
tons to select Next, and then
press [ENTER].
ENTER
Push Enter : Next
Notes:
The options are:
• Make sure the microphone is hori-
zontal.
Next: Proceed to the next step.
Retry: Return to step 2 and try again.
Cancel: Cancel the automatic speaker
setup.
ENTER
• If there’s an obstacle between the
microphone and any speaker, the
automatic setup will not work cor-
rectly. Set up the room as you would
when enjoying a DVD movie.
The following screen appears.
5
• Positioning the microphone close to
where your ears would normally be
will provide the best results.You can
set the height of the microphone by
using a tripod or level table.
AUDYSSEY
Auto Speaker Setup
Please place microphone at
2nd Position at ear height.
Push Enter : Next
Press [ENTER].
3
AUDYSSEY
Auto Speaker Setup
Place the setup microphone at
the next position (see page 52),
and then press [ENTER].
Audyssey MultEQ XT performs more
measurements. This takes a few min-
utes.
ENTER
Do not unplug microphone.
Please keep quiet.
ENTER
Now Measuring...
AUDYSSEY
Auto Speaker Setup
A test tone is output by each speaker in
turn, as Audyssey MultEQ XT deter-
mines which speakers are connected.
This takes a few minutes.
Do not unplug microphone.
Please keep quiet.
Now Measuring...
Note:
• If any extraneous noise is picked up
by the microphone, the automatic
setup may not work correctly, so
keep quiet.
When prompted, place the setup
microphone at the next position,
and repeat step 5.
6
53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
First Time Setup—Continued
After the 3rd and 7th measurements,
the following screen appears.
Review SP Distance: Review the
speaker distance settings (see
“Reviewing the Results” on
page 56).
7
AUDYSSEY
Auto Speaker Setup
ENTER
Please select “Next”, when measuring
next position, and select “finish”,
when ending.
Review SP Level: Review the speaker
levelsettings(see“Reviewing
the Results” on page 56).
Cancel: Cancel the automatic speaker
setup.
Next
finish(Calculate)
ENTER
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select an option, and
then press [ENTER].
Next: Select this if you want to mea-
sure another listening posi-
tion. After the 8th
]
If you selected “Save,” the results are
saved, and the following screen
appears.
10
AUDYSSEY
Auto Speaker Setup
measurement has been taken,
the procedure automatically
proceeds to step 8.
Saving...
Finish(Calculate):Select this if you
don’t want to measure any
more listening positions and
are ready to calculate the
Disconnect the setup micro-
phone.
11
results, then go to step 8.
AUDYSSEY
Auto Speaker Setup
When the measurements are
complete, the following screen
appears.
8
9
Please unplug microphone.
AUDYSSEY
Auto Speaker Setup
Calculating...
Notes:
• When the automatic speaker setup is complete, the
Equalizer Settings (page 99) will be set to Audyssey.
• You can cancel the automatic speaker setup at any
point in the procedure simply by disconnecting the
setup microphone.
When the calculations are com-
plete, the following screen
appears.
ENTER
AUDYSSEY
Auto Speaker Setup
Error Messages
Save
Review SP Config
Review SP Distance
Review SP Level
Cancel
During the automatic speaker setup, one of the following
error messages may appear:
ENTER
❑ Ambient noise is too high
AUDYSSEY
Auto Speaker Setup
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
]
buttons to select an option, and
then press [ENTER].
Save: Save the calculated settings
and exit the automatic
Ambient noise is too high.
Retry
Cancel
speaker setup.
Review SP Config: Review the
speakerconfigurationsettings
(see “Reviewing the Results”
on page 56).
This message appears if there’s too much background
noise and the measurements cannot be performed prop-
erly. Remove the source of the noise and try again, or
cancel the automatic speaker setup.
54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
First Time Setup—Continued
❑ Speaker Detect Error
AUDYSSEY
Auto Speaker Setup
-----Speaker Detect Error-----
AUDYSSEY
Auto Speaker Setup
-----Speaker Detect Error-----
FL : Error
SL : Yes
SBL : Yes
C : Yes
FR : Yes
SR : Yes
SBR : Yes
SW : Yes
FL : Yes
SL : Yes
SBL : Yes
C : No
FR : Yes
SR : Yes
SBR : Yes
SW : Yes
Retry
Cancel
Retry
Cancel
There is a problem with a speaker. The speaker may be
broken or the subwoofer may be emitting sound that is
too high.
This message appears if a speaker is not detected. “Yes”
means that a speaker was detected. “No” means that no
speaker was detected. Check your speaker connections
and retry, or cancel the automatic speaker setup.
AUDYSSEY
Auto Speaker Setup
AUDYSSEY
Auto Speaker Setup
-----Speaker Detect Error-----
Speaker Detect Error
FL : Yes
SL : ---
SBL : ---
C : Yes
FR : No
SR : ---
SBR : ---
SW : ---
Retry
Cancel
Retry
Cancel
A different number of speakers has been detected.
❑ Writing Error
One of the front speakers has not been detected.
AUDYSSEY
Auto Speaker Setup
AUDYSSEY
Auto Speaker Setup
-----Speaker Detect Error-----
FL : Yes
SL : ---
SBL : ---
C : Yes
FR : Yes
SR : No
SBR : ---
SW : ---
Writing Error!
Retry
Cancel
Retry
Cancel
This message appears if saving fails. Try saving again, or
cancel the automatic speaker setup.
One of the surround speakers has not been detected.
If this message appears repeatedly, the AV controller
may be malfunctioning and you should contact the
dealer from whom you purchased this unit.
AUDYSSEY
Auto Speaker Setup
-----Speaker Detect Error-----
FL : Yes
SL : ---
SBL : ---
C : Yes
FR : Yes
SR : No
SBR : Yes
SW : ---
Retry
Cancel
The surround back speakers have been detected but the
surround speakers haven’t.
AUDYSSEY
Auto Speaker Setup
-----Speaker Detect Error-----
FL : Yes
SL : ---
SBL : No
C : Yes
FR : Yes
SR : Yes
SBR : Yes
SW : ---
Retry
Cancel
The right surround back speaker has been detected but
the left surround back speaker hasn’t.
55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
First Time Setup—Continued
Changing the Speaker Settings Manually
Reviewing the Results
In some cases, the measurements taken by the automatic
speaker setup may not provide usable results. If running
the speaker setup a second time doesn’t help, you’ll have
to set the speaker settings manually (see pages 94–99).
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
]
buttons to select the settings that
you want to review, and then
press [ENTER].
ENTER
Notes:
AUDYSSEY
Auto Speaker Setup
• For THX-certified speakers, the 80 Hz (THX) cross-
over frequency is recommended. If you use the auto-
matic speaker setup, you’ll need to manually select
80 Hz (THX) for each THX-certified speaker (see
page 94).
Save
Review SP Config
Review SP Distance
Review SP Level
Cancel
ENTER
• Because of the complexities of low-frequency sounds
and the way they interact with a room, THX recom-
mends setting the subwoofer level and distance manu-
ally.
The options are:
Review SP Config
Review the speaker configuration
settings.
Using a Powered Subwoofer
If you’re using a powered subwoofer, as it outputs very
low-frequency sound and its position is usually low
down, it may not be detected by the automatic speaker
setup. In this case, increase the subwoofer’s volume,
select its highest crossover frequency, and then try run-
ning the automatic speaker setup again. Note that if the
volume is set too high and the sound distorts, it may not
be detected, so use an appropriate volume level. If the
subwoofer has a low-pass filter switch, set it to Off or
Direct. Refer to your subwoofer’s instruction manual for
details.
AUDYSSEY
Auto Speaker Setup
Review SP Config
Subwoofer
Front
:
:
:
:
:
:
Yes
Full Band
80Hz
Center
Surround
Surr Back
Surr Back Ch
100Hz
150Hz
2ch
Review SP Distance
Review the speaker distance set-
tings.
AUDYSSEY
Auto Speaker Setup
Review SP Distance
Left
Center
Right
Surr Right
Surr Back R
Surr Back L
Surr Left
Subwoofer
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
15ft
15ft
15ft
7ft
7ft
7ft
7ft
15ft
Review SP Level
Review the speaker level settings.
AUDYSSEY
Auto Speaker Setup
Review SP Level
Left
Center
Right
Surr Right
Surr Back R
Surr Back L
Surr Left
Subwoofer
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
+12dB
0dB
–12dB
+3dB
+4dB
-6dB
-3dB
0dB
Press [RETURN] to return to the pre-
vious screen.
56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PlayingYour AV Components
Basic AV Controller Operation
ON
STANDBY
TV
INPUT
DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
3
+
TV CH
-
1
GAME/TV
4
2
AUX1
5
3
AUX
6
2
MASTER VOLUME
TAPE
7
TUNER
8
CD
9
1
STANDBY/ON
TV VOL
PHONO
D. TUN
+10
-- --- 10
/
CLEAR
0
STANDBY
11
12
ZONE
ZONE
2
3
INPUT SELECTOR
MACRO
ZONE
ZONE
3
2
1
2
3
PURE AUDIO
AUDIO SEL
DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
GAME/TV
AUX
1
AUX
2
TAPE
TUNER
CD
PHONO
DISPLAY
PUSH TO OPEN
REMOTE MODE
DVD
VCR
CD
CDR/MD
TV
CABLE
SAT
DOCK
RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
1
3
DIMMER
1
+
CH
ENTER
VOL
DISC
ALBUM
-
P
Use the AV controller’s input selector buttons to select an input source.
1
AV controller
Remote
To select an input source with the remote controller, press its
[RECEIVER] REMOTE MODE button, and then use its INPUT SELECTOR
buttons.
controller
RECEIVER
DVD
VCR/DVR CBL/SAT
GAME/TV
TAPE
AUX 1
AUX 2
CD
DVD
1
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
3
TUNER
2
AUX1
5
GAME/TV
4
AUX
6
2
PHONO
TAPE
7
TUNER
8
CD
9
PHONO
+10
Start playback on the source component.
2
3
To watch a DVD or other video source, on your TV, select the video input that’s con-
nected to the AV controller’s COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT 1, COMPO-
NENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT 2/ZONE 2 OUT, HDMI OUT MAIN, HDMI OUT
SUB, or MONITOR OUT.
On some DVD players, you may need to change the digital or HDMI audio output
settings.
To adjust the volume, use the MASTER VOLUME control or the remote
controller’s [VOL] button.
Since the AV controller is designed for home theaters, it has a wide volume range for
precise adjustment. The volume can be set to –∞ dB, –81.5 dB, –81.0 dB through
+18.0 dB.
Remote
controller
AV controller
MASTER VOLUME
VOL
Select a listening mode and enjoy!
See “Using the Listening Modes” on page 79.
4
57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Listening to the Radio
■ Manual Tuning Mode
Listening to AM/FM Stations
Press the [TUNING MODE] button
so that the AUTO indicator disap-
pears from the display.
TUNING
MODE
1
TUNING MODE
TUNING
MASTER VOLUME
STANDBY/ON
Press and hold theTUNING Up or
Down [ ]/[ ] button.
The frequency stops changing when
you release the button.
STANDBY
2
ZONE
ZONE
2
3
PURE AUDIO
AUDIO SEL
DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
GAME/TV
AUX
1
AUX
2
TAPE
TUNER
CD
PHONO
DISPLAY
PUSH TO OPEN
TUNING
TUNING
PRESET
RETURN
ZONE
ZONE
2
3
OFF
LEVEL
TONE
HDMI OUT
STEREO
THX
SETUP MIC
AUX
2
L
INPUT
TUNING
PHONES
POWER
RT/PTY/TP MEMORY MODE
SETUP
CLEAR
ON
OFF
DIGITAL INPUT
LISTENING MODE
S
VIDEO
VIDEO
AUDIO
R
DIGITAL
ENTER
TUNING
Press the button repeatedly to change
the frequency one step at a time.
TUNING
TUNER
With the built-in tuner, you can enjoy AM and FM radio
stations and store your favorite stations as presets for
easy selection.
The FM frequency changes in 0.2 MHz steps, 10 kHz
steps for AM.
In Manual Tuning mode, FM stations will be in mono.
Use the [TUNER] input selector
button to select AM or FM.
In this example, FM has been selected.
Tuning into Weak FM Stereo Stations
If the signal from a stereo FM station is weak, it may be
impossible to get good reception. In this case, switch to
Manual Tuning mode and listen to the station in mono.
TUNER
Band
Frequency
(Actual display depends on country.)
Tuning into AM/FM Radio Stations
■ Auto Tuning Mode
Press the [TUNING MODE] button
so that the AUTO indicator
TUNING
MODE
1
appears on the display.
Press the TUNING Up or Down
2
[
]/[ ] button.
Searching stops when a station is
found.
TUNING
TUNING
When tuned into a station, the TUNED indicator
appears. When tuned into a stereo FM station, the FM
STEREO indicator also appears.
TUNED
AUTO
FM STEREO
58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Listening to the Radio—Continued
■ Tuning into Stations by Frequency
You can tune into AM and FM stations directly by enter-
ing the appropriate frequency.
Displaying AM/FM Radio Information
DISPLAY
MASTER VOLUME
STANDBY/ON
STANDBY
ON
STANDBY
ZONE
ZONE
2
3
TV
INPUT
DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
3
PURE AUDIO
AUDIO SEL
DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
GAME/TV
AUX
1
AUX
2
TAPE
TUNER
CD
PHONO
DISPLAY
PUSH TO OPEN
Number
buttons
+
TV CH
-
1
GAME/TV
4
2
AUX1
5
AUX
6
2
TAPE
7
TUNER
8
CD
9
TV VOL
PHONO
D. TUN
+10
-- --- 10
/
INPUT SELECTOR
MACRO
CLEAR
12
0
D.TUN
11
ZONE
ZONE
3
2
1
2
3
Press the [DISPLAY] button to
display the available information.
REMOTE MODE
DVD
VCR
CD
CDR/MD
TV
CABLE
SAT
DOCK
RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
RECEIVER
DISPLAY
Band
Frequency
Preset #
Press the [RECEIVER] button,
followed by the [D.TUN] button.
The [RECEIVER] button flashes.
1
2
RECEIVER
Listening mode
D. TUN
CLEAR
Note:
(Actual display depends on country.)
• When you select a preset with a custom name (see
page 102), its name is displayed instead of the band
and frequency.
Within 8 seconds, use the num-
ber buttons to enter the fre-
quency of the radio station.
For example, to tune to 87.5 (FM),
press 8, 7, 5.
DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
1
GAME/TV
4
2
AUX1
5
3
AUX
6
2
TAPE
7
TUNER
8
CD
9
PHONO
+10
0
Note:
While the [RECEIVER] button is flash-
ing, you cannot select another input
source with the remote controller.
59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Listening to the Radio—Continued
Listening to HD Radio™ Stations
-
T
8
TAPE
7
HD Radio technology brings digital radio to conven-
tional analog AM and FM radio stations, with improved
sound quality, better reception, and new data services.
HD Radio technology provides CD-quality sound for
FM stations and FM-quality sound for AM stations. In
addition, FM HD Radio stations can transmit multiple
programs on the same frequency by using multicast
channels. Text data display incudes station name, song
title, artist name, and so on.
TV VOL
PHONO
D. TUN
+10
-- --- 10
/
INPUT SELECTOR
MACRO
CLEAR
12
0
11
ZONE
ZONE
3
2
1
2
3
REMOTE MODE
DVD
VCR
CD
CDR/MD
TV
CABLE
SAT
DOCK
RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
DIMMER
,
ENTER
+
CH
ENTER
VOL
DISC
ALBUM
For more information about HD Radio technology, visit:
www.ibiquity.com
www.hdradio.com
-
PREV
CH
DISPLAY
DISPLAY
MUTING
REC
PLAYLIST
RANDOM
LISTENING MODE
SURR
STEREO
HD Radio stations broadcast on the same AM and FM
frequencies they’ve always used, and you can receive
them by tuning into your favorite station as normal (see
page 58).You can store them as presets just like AM and
FM stations (see page 75).
REPEAT
AUDIO
DIRECT
SUBTITLE PLAY MODE
PURE
A
THX
ALL ST
-
+
LEVEL
TEST TONE
CH SEL
LEVEL
OPEN/CLOSE VIDEO OFF
AUDIO SEL
VCR
L
NIGHT
Re-EQ
HDD
DVD
AUDIO SEL
RC-690
M
If the currentAM or FM station supports HD Radio tech-
nology, the HD indicator lights up.
While a digital HD Radio transmission is being received,
the DIGITAL indicator lights up. While an analog HD
Radio transmission is being received, the ANALOG
indicator lights up.
AUDIO SEL
MASTER VOLUME
STANDBY/ON
STANDBY
ZONE
ZONE
2
3
PURE AUDIO
AUDIO SEL
DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
GAME/TV
AUX
1
AUX
2
TAPE
TUNER
CD
PHONO
DISPLAY
PUSH TO OPEN
Station name
HD indicator
TUNING
PRESET
RETURN
ZONE
ZONE
2
3
OFF
LEVEL
TONE
HDMI OUT
STEREO
THX
SETUP MIC
AUX
2
L
INPUT
TUNING
PHONES
POWER
RT/PTY/TP MEMORY MODE
SETUP
CLEAR
ON
OFF
DIGITAL INPUT
LISTENING MODE
S
VIDEO
VIDEO
AUDIO
R
DIGITAL
ENTER
TUNING
ENTER
DISPLAY
Song title
Artist name
HD Radio channel number
• If the current AM or FM station supports HD Radio
technology, the station’s name will be displayed
instead of the band and frequency.
• When music data is received, song title and artist name
information is displayed.
• If the current HD Radio station supports multicast
channels, the name of the currently selected multicast
channel will be displayed.
60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Listening to the Radio—Continued
Selecting Multicast Channels
Displaying HD Radio Information
FM HD Radio stations can transmit multiple programs
on the same frequency by using what are calledmulticast
channels. If the current HD Radio station is broadcasting
multicast channels, the SPS (secondary program ser-
vices) indicator lights up.
Press the [DISPLAY] button repeatedly to cycle through
the available information.
Frequency
Press [ENTER].
The SPS indicator flashes.
1
ENTER
Station information
Artist information
Use the Up and Down Arrow
2
[
]/[ ] buttons to select a multi-
cast channel, and then press
[ENTER] within 5 seconds.
ENTER
If you select a multicast channel that is
not currently broadcasting, a plus [+]
symbol will appear, indicating that the
channel has been reserved. When
broadcasting commences, that channel
will be selected automatically.
Song title information
ENTER
Reserved channel indication
HD Radio channel number
Note:
• Multicast channels are not available
on AM.
Selecting the Audio Format (Blend Mode)
HD Radio stations transmit both analog and digital ver-
sions of their programs and you can choose which one
you want to listen to.
Remote
controller
Use the [AUDIO SEL] button to
select Auto or Analog.
AUDIO SEL
AV controller
Auto: Select to use the digital sig-
AUDIO SEL
nal.
Analog: Select to use the analog sig-
nal.
Note:
• Multicast channels 2 through 8 only carry a digital sig-
nal, so to select an audio format, you must select mul-
ticast channel #1 first.
61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Listening to the Radio—Continued
Connecting the XM Mini-Tuner and Home
Dock
®
Listening to XM Satellite Radio
To receive XM Satellite Radio, you need an XM Mini-
Tuner and Home Dock, which includes a home antenna.
These are sold separately. For connection information,
refer to the instruction manual supplied with the XM
Mini-Tuner and Home Dock.
Important XM Radio Information
XM Satellite Radio offers an extraordinary variety of
commercial-free music, plus the best in sports, news,
talk and entertainment. XM is broadcast in superior
digital audio from coast to coast. From rock to reg-
gae, from classical to hip hop, XM has something for
every music fan. XM’s dedication to playing the rich-
est selection of music is matched by its passion for
live sporting events, talk radio, up-to-the-minute
news, stand-up comedy, children’s programming, and
much more. For U.S. customers, information about
XM Satellite Radio is available online at www.xmra-
dio.com. For Canadian customers, information about
XM Canada is online at
XM Mini-Tuner jack
XM
XM
SIRIUS
www.xmradio.ca.
Note:
M
ZONE
2
1
2
Hardware and required monthly subscription sold sepa-
rately. Other fees and taxes, including a one-time activa-
tion fee may apply. Subscription fee is consumer only.
All fees and programming subject to change. Channels
with frequent explicit language are indicated with an XL.
Channel blocking is available for XM radio receivers by
calling 1-800-XMRADIO (US residents) and
1-877-GET-XMSR (Canadian residents).
REMOTE MODE
DVD
VCR
CD
CDR/MD
TV
CABLE
SAT
DOCK
RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
RECEIVER
ENTER
DIMMER
+
CH
ENTER
VOL
DISC
ALBUM
-
PREV
CH
SETUP
DISPLAY
MUTING
For a full listing of the XM commercial-free channels
and advertising-supported channels, visit
lineup.xmradio.com (US residents) or xmradio.ca
(Canadian residents).
Subscriptions subject to Customer Agreement available
at xmradio.com (US residents) and xmradio.ca (Cana-
dian residents). Only available in the 48 contiguous
United States and Canada. ©2007 XM Satellite Radio
Inc. All rights reserved. All other trademarks are the
property of their respective owners.
Setting the Satellite Radio Mode
Before you can listen to XM Satellite Radio, you must
set the Satellite Radio mode to XM.
Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button, followed by the
[SETUP] button.
1
RECEIVER
A warning against reverse engineering:
The main menu appears onscreen.
It is prohibited to, and you agree that you will not, copy,
decompile, disassemble, reverse engineer, hack, manip-
ulate, or otherwise access and/or make available any
technology incorporated in receivers compatible with
the XM Satellite Radio system. Furthermore, the
®
AMBE voice compression software included in this
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
]
product is protected by intellectual property rights
including patent rights, copyrights, and trade secrets of
Digital Voice Systems, Inc. The software is licensed
solely for use within this product. The user of this or any
other software contained in an XM Radio is explicitly
prohibited from attempting to copy, decompile, reverse
engineer, hack, manipulate or disassemble the object
code, or in any other way convert the object code into
human-readable form.
2
buttons to select “7. Hardware
Setup,” and then press [ENTER].
The Hardware Setup menu appears.
ENTER
7.Hardware Setup
1.Remote Control
2.Zone2/Zone3
3.Tuner
ENTER
4.Analog Multich
5.HDMI
62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Listening to the Radio—Continued
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select “3.Tuner,” and
then press [ENTER].
]
3
ON
STANDBY
TV
INPUT
ENTER
DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
3
The Tuner screen appears.
Number
buttons
+
TV CH
-
1
GAME/TV
4
2
AUX1
5
AUX
6
2
7-3.Tuner
TAPE
7
TUNER
8
CD
9
Satellite Radio
None
TV VOL
PHONO
D. TUN
+10
-- --- 10
/
INPUT SELECTOR
MACRO
CLEAR
0
TUNER
11
12
ENTER
D.TUN
ZONE
ZONE
3
2
1
2
3
REMOTE MODE
DVD
VCR
CD
CDR/MD
TV
CABLE
SAT
DOCK
RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
RECEIVER
ENTER
Use the Left and Right [ ]/[
buttons to select “XM.”
]
DIMMER
4
If there are 2 items on the Tuner
screen,use Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select “Satellite
Radio.”
+
ENTER
CH
ENTER
VOL
DISC
ALBUM
]
-
PREV
CH
MUTING
Pressing the Left and Right [ ]/[
buttons cycles through the following
]
options: None → XM → SIRIUS →
XM/SIRIUS
ENTER
Selecting XM Satellite Radio
None: Select if you’re not using
satellite radio.
XM: Select to use XM Satellite
Radio.
On the AV controller, press the
[TUNER] input selector button
repeatedly to select XM.
AV controller
TUNER
SIRIUS: Select to use SIRIUS Satel-
lite Radio.
On the remote controller, press
the [RECEIVER] REMOTE MODE
button, and then press the
[TUNER] INPUT SELECTOR but-
ton repeatedly to select XM.
Remote
XM/SIRIUS:Select to use XM Satel-
lite Radio and SIRIUS Sat-
ellite Radio.
controller
RECEIVER
When you’ve finished, press the
[SETUP] button.
Setup closes.
5
If “CHECK XM TUNER” appears on
the display, make sure the XM Mini-
Tuner is connected properly.
TUNER
Signing Up for XM Satellite Radio
Once you have installed the XM Mini-Tuner and Home
Dock, you are ready to subscribe to XM Satellite Radio.
You’ll need a major credit card and your XM Radio ID.
There are three places you can find your 8-character XM
Radio ID:
TUNING
/
TUNER
MASTER VOLUME
STANDBY/ON
STANDBY
ZONE
ZONE
2
3
1. On the XM Mini-Tuner
PURE AUDIO
AUDIO SEL
DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
GAME/TV
AUX
1
AUX
2
TAPE
TUNER
CD
PHONO
DISPLAY
PUSH TO OPEN
TUNING
PRESET
RETURN
2. On the XM Mini-Tuner packaging
3. On XM Channel 0, as explained below
ZONE
ZONE
2
3
OFF
LEVEL
TONE
HDMI OUT
STEREO
THX
SETUP MIC
AUX
2
L
INPUT
TUNING
PHONES
POWER
RT/PTY/TP MEMORY MODE
SETUP
CLEAR
ON
OFF
DIGITAL INPUT
LISTENING MODE
S
VIDEO
VIDEO
AUDIO
R
DIGITAL
ENTER
TUNING
Use the Tuning Up and Down
1
SETUP
ENTER
[
]/[ ] buttons to select RADIO
ID.
TUNING
Your XM Radio ID number is dis-
played. Write it below for reference.
TUNING
ID
63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Listening to the Radio—Continued
■ Category Search Mode
To sign up, go to:
http://activate.xmradio.com
Or call: 1-800-967-2346
2
Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
1
MODE button, and then press the
[ENTER] button repeatedly to
select Category Search mode.
RECEIVER
For XM Canada, go to:
http://xmradio.ca
Or call: 1-877-438-9677
ENTER
Notes:
• RADIO ID cannot be selected in Category Search
mode. You must select Channel Search mode (see
right column).
Use the Left and Right [ ]/[
buttons to select a category, and
use the Up and Down [ ]/[
]
2
• The following letters are not used in XM Satellite
Radio IDs: I, O, S, F.
]
ENTER
• XM Satellite Radio will transmit a special signal to
your AV controller to activate the full channel lineup.
Activation normally takes between 10 and 15 minutes,
but during busy peak periods, you may need to leave
the AV controller turned on for up to an hour.
buttons to select a channel in
that category.
Selecting XM Radio Channels
■ Direct Tuning
You can select an XM radio channel directly by entering
its number.
There are three ways to select XM radio channels:
1. Channel Search mode: select any channel.
2. Category Search mode: select channels by cate-
gory.
Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button, followed by the
[D.TUN] button.
1
RECEIVER
3. Direct tuning: enter channel number.
The [RECEIVER] button flashes.
Note:
You can’t select Channel Search mode or Category
D. TUN
CLEAR
Search mode while the Tuning Arrow
are flashing, as tuning is in progress.
indicators
■ Channel Search Mode
Within 8 seconds, use the num-
ber buttons to enter the channel
number.
For example, to select channel #20,
press 0, 2, 0, or 2, 0, [ENTER].
2
Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button, and then press the
[ENTER] button repeatedly to
select Channel Search mode.
1
2
DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
3
RECEIVER
ENTER
1
GAME/TV
4
2
AUX1
5
AUX
6
2
TAPE
7
TUNER
8
CD
9
D. TUN
CLEAR
Note:
12
0
11
While the [RECEIVER] button is flash-
ing, you cannot select another input
source with the remote controller.
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select a channel.
]
Channel number
ENTER
Channel name
You can also use the Left and Right
]/[ ] buttons to select a category.
[
64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Listening to the Radio—Continued
Displaying XM Radio Information
MEMORY
TUNING MODE
RETURN
AV controller
Press the [DISPLAY] button
repeatedly to cycle through the
MASTER VOLUME
available information.
STANDBY/ON
DISPLAY
STANDBY
ZONE
ZONE
2
3
Remote
controller
PURE AUDIO
AUDIO SEL
DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
GAME/TV
AUX
1
AUX
2
TAPE
TUNER
CD
PHONO
DISPLAY
PUSH TO OPEN
TUNING
PRESET
RETURN
ZONE
ZONE
2
3
OFF
LEVEL
TONE
HDMI OUT
STEREO
THX
SETUP MIC
AUX
2
L
INPUT
TUNING
PHONES
POWER
RT/PTY/TP MEMORY MODE
SETUP
CLEAR
ON
OFF
DISPLAY
DIGITAL INPUT
LISTENING MODE
S
VIDEO
VIDEO
AUDIO
R
DIGITAL
ENTER
TUNING
The following information can be displayed:
DISPLAY
ENTER
TUNING
Channel name
/
↓
REMOTE
Channel number & preset number
DVD
VCR
CD
ZONE
2
CDR/MD
↓
TV
CABLE
SAT
DOCK
RECEIVER
RECEIVER
Category → Artist → Song title → Listening mode
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
DIMMER
Notes:
+
• If the category, artist, or song title is not available,
“- - -” will be displayed instead.
ENTER
CH
CH +/–
ENTER
VOL
DISC
ALBUM
-
• The listening mode is not displayed when Zone 2 or
Zone 3 is selected.
PREV
CH
RETURN
DISPLAY
DISPLAY
MUTING
Positioning the XM Mini-Tuner System
You can check the signal strength of the XM radio signal
and adjust the position of the XM Mini-Tuner system
accordingly.
Selecting Channels on the AV controller:
Press the [TUNING MODE] button
TUNING
MODE
1
repeatedly to select Channel
Search mode or Category Search
mode.
Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button, followed by the
1
RECEIVER
[SETUP] button.
Press [ENTER] repeatedly to
select a category.
The main menu appears onscreen.
2
3
ENTER
Use theTuning Up and Down [ ]/
[
] buttons to select a channel.
In Channel Search mode, you can
select any channel.
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select “4. Source
]
TUNING
2
In Category Search mode, you can only
select channels from the currently
selected category.
Setup,” and then press [ENTER].
The Source Setup menu appears.
ENTER
TUNING
4.Source Setup
DVD
1.IntelliVolume
2.A/V Sync
3.Name Edit
Selecting the Previous Channel:
ENTER
4.Satellite Radio
5.SIRIUS Parental Lock
AV controller
To listen to the previously
RETURN
selected XM channel, press the
[RETURN] button.
Note:
Remote
• If the Satellite Radio mode is set to
None (see page 63), the “4. Satellite
Radio” item is not available.
controller
65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Listening to the Radio—Continued
❑ UPDATING
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select “4. Satellite
Radio,” and then press [ENTER].
The Satellite Radio screen appears.
The name of the currently selected
input selector is displayed in a box.
]
3
XM is updating your Mini-Tuner with the latest
encryption code. Wait a few seconds until the update
is done. Alternatively, you may be attempting to tune
to a channel that is blocked or that you cannot
receive with your subscription package. To receive
that channel, contact XM Satellite Radio.
ENTER
❑ NO SIGNAL
ENTER
The XM Mini-Tuner cannot receive the satellite sig-
nal. Check the XM antenna for obstructions to the
southern sky. Check the antenna positioning with the
Antenna Aiming function (see left column).
Position the XM Mini-Tuner
Antenna so that as many bars as
possible (up to 3) appear on the
XM Satellite signal strength
meter.
The best signal is achieved when the
antenna is pointing to the southern sky
through an unobstructed window.
4
❑ LOADING
The AV controller is tuning or decoding audio or text
data. Please wait. If this occurs often, check the XM
antenna position with the Antenna Aiming function
(see left column).
❑ OFF AIR
The XM channel you selected is not currently broad-
casting. Select another channel.
4-4.SAT Radio
XM Antenna Aiming
❑ UPGRADE XM TUNER
The connected XM CNP-1000 is incompatible. The
AV controller features advanced technology that is
designed for use with the XM Mini-Tuner. Contact
XM Listener Care and ask about upgrading your XM
CNP-1000 to an XM Mini-Tuner. Have the AV con-
troller’s model name and CNP-1000 XM ID number
ready beforehand, and explain that your AV control-
ler is displaying the message “Upgrade XM Tuner.”
If you already have an XM Mini-Tuner connected
and you see this message, turn off the AV controller,
make sure the XM Mini-Tuner is properly seated in
the Mini-Tuner Dock, and then turn the AV control-
ler back on again. If the message reappears, contact
XM Listener Care and explain the issue that you’re
experiencing and the corrective actions you’ve tried.
Satellite
Terrestrial
If you cannot receive a satellite signal,
position the XM Mini-Tuner System so
that as many bars as possible (up to 3)
appear on the XM Terrestrial signal
strength meter.
Notes:
• So long as the signal strength is good, you can enjoy
tion.
• Terrestrial signals are only available in certain areas.
ellite Radio mode is set to XM or XM/SIRIUS (see
page 63).
❑ CHECK XM TUNER
The AV controller is having difficulty communicat-
ing with the XM Mini-Tuner module. Make sure the
XM Mini-Tuner is properly seated in the Mini-Tuner
Dock. And make sure the Mini-Tuner Dock cable is
properly connected to the AV controller and is not
damaged. If the issue persists, contact XM Listener
Care. Have the AV controller’s model name ready
beforehand, and explain the issue that you’re experi-
encing and the corrective actions you’ve tried.
• If you’re using both XM Satellite Radio and SIRIUS
Satellite Radio and the Satellite mode is set to
XM/SIRIUS (see page 63), signal strength meters for
both systems appear on the same screen.
XM Radio Messages
The following messages may appear while using XM
Satellite radio.
❑ Unavailable Channel
You may be attempting to select a channel that is
unavailable or has changed to a different channel
number. Check xmradio.com for the latest channel
listing.
❑ CHECK ANTENNA
The XM antenna is not properly connected to the
Mini-Tuner Dock. Check the connection. Check the
antenna cable for damage.
66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Listening to the Radio—Continued
®
Listening to SIRIUS Satellite Radio
Indoor/outdoor antenna
with 21-foot cable
Important SIRIUS Satellite Radio Information
SIRIUS is available in the US for subscribers with
addresses in the continental US and is available in
Canada for subscribers with a Canadian address. To
Get SIRIUS Satellite Radio a subscription and
compatible tuner and antenna are required and sold
separately. Visit sirius.com for the most complete
and up-to-date channel lineup and information.
“SIRIUS” and the SIRIUS dog logo and related
marks are trademarks of SIRIUS Satellite Radio Inc.
SiriusConnect
AC power
receiver
8-pin mini DIN
connector cable
SIRIUS
SIRIUS
jack
XM
SIRIUS
Note:
Hardware and required basic monthly subscription sold
separately. Installation costs and other fees and taxes,
including a one-time activation fee may apply. Subscrip-
tion fee is consumer only. All fees and programming
subject to change.
AV controller
To use the included antenna indoors, you must place it at
a north-, west-, or east-facing window, depending on
where you live. If this isn’t possible, you’ll need to
install it outside, away from any overhead obstructions.
What is SIRIUS Satellite Radio?
Simply The Best Radio on Radio with all your favor-
TM
ite entertainment including 100% commercial-free
music, plus superior sports coverage, uncensored talk
and comedy, world-class entertainment, news, weather
and more for your car, home or office. For more informa-
tion visit sirius.com or siriuscanada.ca
Positioning the Antenna
For a consistent satellite signal, the antenna must be
positioned correctly. Use the following map to determine
which area you are in and position the antenna accord-
ingly.
A warning against reverse engineering:
It is prohibited to copy, decompile, disassemble, reverse
engineer, or manipulate any technology incorporated in
receivers compatible with the SIRIUS Satellite Radio
system.
SKY
NORTH
“SIRIUS” and the SIRIUS dog
logo are registered trademarks of
SIRIUS Satellite Radio Inc.
1
4
5
WEST
EAST
3
2
HORIZON
SOUTH
Setting Up the SiriusConnect™ Home
Tuner
Area 1: Point the antenna toward the sky in the east,
northeast, or southeast, either through a window or out-
side.
The optional SiriusConnect Home tuner kit includes
everything for easy home installation, including the Sir-
iusConnect receiver, indoor/outdoor antenna with 21-
foot cable, 8-pin mini DIN connector cable, and an AC
power adapter. See the SiriusConnect Home tuner’s
instructions for more information.
Area 2: Point the antenna toward the sky in the north or
northeast, either through a window or outside.
Area 3: Point the antenna toward the sky in the north or
northwest, either through a window or outside.
Use the 8-pin mini DIN connector cable to connect the
SiriusConnect receiver to the SIRIUS jack on the rear of
the AV controller.
Area 4: Point the antenna toward the sky in the west,
northwest, or southwest, either through a window or
outside.
Area 5: Put the antenna outside and point it straight up.
The antenna cannot be used indoors.
67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Listening to the Radio—Continued
TUNING
/
TUNER
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select “3.Tuner,” and
then press [ENTER].
]
3
4
MASTER VOLUME
STANDBY/ON
ENTER
STANDBY
The Tuner screen appears.
ZONE
ZONE
2
3
7-3.Tuner
PURE AUDIO
AUDIO SEL
DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
GAME/TV
AUX
1
AUX
2
TAPE
TUNER
CD
PHONO
DISPLAY
PUSH TO OPEN
TUNING
PRESET
RETURN
ZONE
ZONE
2
3
OFF
LEVEL
TONE
HDMI OUT
STEREO
THX
SETUP MIC
AUX
2
L
INPUT
Satellite Radio
None
TUNING
RT/PTY/TP MEMORY MODE
PHONES
POWER
SETUP
CLEAR
ON
OFF
DIGITAL INPUT
S
VIDEO
VIDEO
AUDIO
R
DIGITAL
LISTENING MODE
ENTER
TUNING
ENTER
SETUP
ENTER
Use the Left and Right [ ]/[
buttons to select “SIRIUS.”
If there are 2 items on the Tuner
screen,use Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select “Satellite
Radio.”
Pressing the Left and Right [ ]/[
buttons cycles through the following
options: None → XM → SIRIUS →
XM/SIRIUS
None: Select if you’re not using
satellite radio.
XM: Select to use XM Satellite
Radio.
SIRIUS: Select to use SIRIUS Satel-
lite Radio.
]
ON
STANDBY
TV
INPUT
ENTER
]
DVD
1
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
+
2
AUX1
5
3
TV CH
GAME/TV
4
AUX
6
2
-
TAPE
7
TUNER
8
CD
9
]
TV VOL
PHONO
D. TUN
TUNER
+10
-- --- 10
/
CLEAR
12
0
11
INPUT SELECTOR
MACRO
ZONE
ZONE
3
2
1
2
3
ENTER
REMOTE MODE
DVD
VCR
CD
CDR/MD
TV
CABLE
SAT
DOCK
RECEIVER
RECEIVER
ENTER
TAPE/AMP
DIMMER
SLEEP
+
CH
ENTER
VOL
DISC
ALBUM
-
PREV
CH
SETUP
XM/SIRIUS:Select to use XM Satel-
lite Radio and SIRIUS Sat-
ellite Radio.
DISPLAY
MUTING
When you’ve finished, press the
[SETUP] button.
5
Setting the Satellite Radio Mode
Setup closes.
Before you can listen to SIRIUS Satellite Radio, you
must set the Satellite Radio mode to SIRIUS.
Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button, followed by the
[SETUP] button.
1
RECEIVER
Selecting SIRIUS Satellite Radio
The main menu appears onscreen.
On the AV controller, press the
AV controller
[TUNER] input selector button
repeatedly to select SIRIUS.
TUNER
On the remote controller, press
the [RECEIVER] REMOTE MODE
button, and then press the
[TUNER] INPUT SELECTOR but-
ton repeatedly to select SIRIUS.
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
]
2
Remote
controller
buttons to select “7. Hardware
Setup,” and then press [ENTER].
The Hardware Setup menu appears.
ENTER
RECEIVER
7.Hardware Setup
If “CHECK SR TUNER” appears on
the display, make sure the SiriusCon-
nect receiver is connected properly. If
“ANTENNA ERROR” appears, make
sure the antenna is connected properly.
1.Remote Control
2.Zone2/Zone3
3.Tuner
4.Analog Multich
5.HDMI
TUNER
ENTER
68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Listening to the Radio—Continued
■ Channel Search Mode
Signing Up for SIRIUS Satellite Radio
Before you can use SIRIUS Satellite Radio, you must
first sign up for an account. You’ll need a major credit
card and your SIRIUS Satellite Radio ID, which you can
get from the AV controller, as explained below, or from
the SiriusConnect Home tuner package.
Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
1
RECEIVER
MODE button, and then press the
[ENTER] button repeatedly to
select Channel Search mode.
ENTER
Use the TUNING Up and Down
1
[
]/[ ] buttons to select
channel 0.
Your SIRIUS Satellite Radio ID num-
ber is displayed. Write it below.
TUNING
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select a channel.
Channel number
]
2
TUNING
ENTER
ID
To sign up, go to:
http://activate.siriusradio.com
2
Channel name
Or call: 1-888-539-SIRIUS (7474)
You can also use the Left and Right
]/[ ] buttons to select a category.
[
Note:
• Your ID is also displayed on the Satellite Radio
screen. See “Positioning the SiriusConnect Home
Antenna” on page 73.
■ Category Search Mode
Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
1
RECEIVER
MODE button, and then press the
[ENTER] button repeatedly to
select Category Search mode.
Selecting SIRIUS Satellite Radio Channels
There are three ways to select SIRIUS Satellite Radio
channels:
ENTER
1. Channel Search mode: select any channel.
2. Category Search mode: select channels by cate-
gory.
3. Direct tuning: enter channel number.
Use the Left and Right [ ]/[
buttons to select a category, and
use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select a channel in
that category.
]
2
]
ENTER
ON
STANDBY
TV
INPUT
DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
3
Number
buttons
+
TV CH
-
1
GAME/TV
4
2
AUX1
5
AUX
6
2
TAPE
7
TUNER
8
CD
9
TV VOL
PHONO
D. TUN
+10
-- --- 10
/
CLEAR
0
11
12
D.TUN
INPUT SELECTOR
MACRO
ZONE
ZONE
3
2
1
2
3
■ Direct Tuning
REMOTE MODE
DVD
VCR
CD
You can select a SIRIUS Satellite Radio channel directly
by entering its number.
CDR/MD
TV
CABLE
SAT
DOCK
RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
RECEIVER
ENTER
DIMMER
Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button, followed by the
[D.TUN] button.
1
+
CH
RECEIVER
ENTER
VOL
DISC
ALBUM
-
The [RECEIVER] button flashes.
PREV
CH
MUTING
D. TUN
CLEAR
69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Listening to the Radio—Continued
Parental Lock
Within 8 seconds, use the num-
ber buttons to enter the channel
number.
For example, to select channel #20,
press 0, 2, 0, or 2, 0, [ENTER].
2
With SIRIUS Parental Lock, you can lock out channels
that you do not want to receive and use a 4-digit PIN
number to prevent others from unlocking them.
DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
3
1
GAME/TV
4
2
AUX1
5
AUX
6
2
TAPE
7
TUNER
8
CD
9
Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button, followed by the
[SETUP] button.
1
D. TUN
CLEAR
RECEIVER
Note:
12
0
11
While the [RECEIVER] button is flash-
ing, you cannot select another input
source with the remote controller.
The main menu appears onscreen.
Notes:
• If you select an unavailable channel, “INVALID
CHANNEL” appears on the display.
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select “4. Source
Setup,” and then press [ENTER].
]
• If you select a channel that you are not subscribed to,
“CALL SIRIUS” appears on the display.
2
• Channels that are locked must be unlocked before you
can listen to them. See “Parental Lock” on right col-
umn for more information.
ENTER
The Source Setup menu appears.
4.Source Setup
DVD
1.IntelliVolume
2.A/V Sync
Selecting Channels on the AV controller:
ENTER
3.Name Edit
4.Satellite Radio
5.SIRIUS Parental Lock
Press the [TUNING MODE] button
repeatedly to select Channel
1
TUNING
MODE
Search mode or Category Search
mode.
Note:
If the Satellite Radio mode is set to
None or XM (see page 68), the “5. SIR-
IUS Parental Lock” item is not avail-
able.
Press [ENTER] repeatedly to
select a category.
2
ENTER
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select “5. SIRIUS
Parental Lock,” and then press
[ENTER].
The SIRIUS Parental Lock screen
appears.
]
3
Use the Tuning Up and Down
3
ENTER
[
]/[ ] buttons to select a chan-
nel.
TUNING
In Channel Search mode, you can
select any channel.
TUNING
4-5.SIRIUS Parental Lock
In Category Search mode, you can only
select channels from the currently
selected category.
ENTER
Enter Code
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Selecting the Previous Channel:
AV controller
To listen to the previously
RETURN
selected SIRIUS Satellite Radio
channel, press the [RETURN]
button.
Remote
controller
70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Listening to the Radio—Continued
When you’ve finished, press
[ENTER] to save your changes,
or press [RETURN] to return to
the previous screen without sav-
ing.
When [ENTER] is pressed, the confir-
mation message “Locked” or
“Unlocked” appears.
Press the [D.TUN] button, and
then use the number buttons to
enter the 4-digit PIN number.
7
8
4
ENTER
D. TUN
CLEAR
Or
or
Use the Left and Right [ ]/[
]
DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
3
buttons to select a number on the
screen, and then press [ENTER].
Repeat this for each of the four
digits in the PIN number.
If you’re entering the PIN number for
the very first time, the PIN is stored,
and the following screen appears.
1
GAME/TV
4
2
AUX1
5
AUX
6
2
TAPE
7
TUNER
8
CD
9
Press the [SETUP] button.
Setup closes.
D. TUN
CLEAR
12
0
11
4-5.SIRIUS Parental Lock
or
Edit Code
Parental Lock
Notes:
• While a channel is locked, it cannot be selected for
listening.
ENTER
• To unlock a channel, you must enter the correct PIN
number and change it to Unlocked in step 6.
If you’ve already set a PIN number, you
must enter the correct PIN to get to this
screen. If you enter the wrong PIN, the
message “Wrong Code!” appears and
you’ll have to enter the PIN again.
ENTER
ON
STANDBY
TV
INPUT
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select“Parental Lock,”
and then press [ENTER].
]
5
6
Number
buttons
DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
3
+
TV CH
-
1
GAME/TV
4
2
AUX1
5
AUX
6
2
ENTER
TAPE
7
TUNER
8
CD
9
The Parental Lock screen appears.
TV VOL
PHONO
D. TUN
+10
-- --- 10
/
INPUT SELECTOR
MACRO
CLEAR
12
0
11
4-5.SIRIUS Parental Lock
Parental Lock
D.TUN
ZONE
ZONE
3
2
1
2
3
REMOTE MODE
Channel
0ch
Status
Locked
ENTER
DVD
VCR
CD
CDR/MD
wwwwwwwww
TV
CABLE
SAT
DOCK
RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
RECEIVER
ENTER
DIMMER
:CHANNEL
:STATUS
:SAVE
:RETURN
ENT
RET
+
CH
ENTER
VOL
DISC
ALBUM
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select a channel, and
]
-
PREV
CH
use the Left and Right [ ]/[
buttons to select Locked or
Unlocked.
]
MUTING
ENTER
Changing the PIN Number
The number, name, and status of the
currently selected channel is displayed.
Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button, followed by the
[SETUP] button.
1
RECEIVER
The main menu appears onscreen.
71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Listening to the Radio—Continued
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select “4. Source
Setup,” and then press [ENTER].
]
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select “Edit Code,”
and then press [ENTER].
The New Code screen appears.
]
2
5
6
ENTER
ENTER
The Source Setup menu appears.
4-5.SIRIUS Parental Lock
4.Source Setup
DVD
1.IntelliVolume
2.A/V Sync
3.Name Edit
4.Satellite Radio
5.SIRIUS Parental Lock
New Code
ENTER
ENTER
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Note:
Press the [D.TUN] button, and
then use the number buttons to
enter the new 4-digit PIN number.
D. TUN
CLEAR
If the Satellite Radio mode is set to
None or XM (see page 68), the “5. SIR-
IUS Parental Lock” item is not avail-
able.
Or
DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
3
1
GAME/TV
4
2
AUX1
5
AUX
6
2
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select “5. SIRIUS
Parental Lock,” and then press
[ENTER].
The SIRIUS Parental Lock screen
appears.
]
3
Use the Left and Right [ ]/[
]
TAPE
7
TUNER
8
CD
9
buttons to select a number on the
screen, and then press [ENTER].
Repeat this for each of the four
digits in the new PIN number.
The Confirm screen appears.
ENTER
D. TUN
CLEAR
12
0
11
or
4-5.SIRIUS Parental Lock
ENTER
4-5.SIRIUS Parental Lock
Enter Code
ENTER
Comfirm
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
D. TUN
CLEAR
Press the [D.TUN] button, and
then use the number buttons to
enter the old 4-digit PIN number.
4
Confirm the new PIN number by
entering it again.
If you confirm the PIN number cor-
rectly, the new PIN is saved and the
message “Complete” appears.
If you confirm the PIN number incor-
rectly, “Wrong Code!” appears, and
you’ll be returned to step 5 to try again.
7
8
Or
DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
3
1
GAME/TV
4
2
AUX1
5
AUX
6
2
Use the Left and Right [ ]/[
]
buttons to select a number on the
screen, and then press [ENTER].
Repeat this for each of the four
digits in the old PIN number.
If you enter the correct PIN number, the
following screen appears.
TAPE
7
TUNER
8
CD
9
D. TUN
CLEAR
12
0
Press the [SETUP] button.
Setup closes.
11
or
4-5.SIRIUS Parental Lock
Edit Code
Parental Lock
ENTER
ENTER
If you enter the wrong PIN number, the
message “Wrong Code!” appears and
you’ll have to enter the PIN again.
72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Listening to the Radio—Continued
Positioning the SiriusConnect Home
Antenna
TUNING
/
TUNER
MASTER VOLUME
STANDBY/ON
You can check the strength of the SIRIUS Satellite Radio
signal and adjust the position of the SiriusConnect Home
antenna accordingly.
STANDBY
ZONE
ZONE
2
3
AUX AUX
PURE AUDIO
AUDIO SEL
DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
GAME/TV
1
2
TAPE
TUNER
CD
PHONO
DISPLAY
PUSH TO OPEN
TUNING
RETURN
ZONE
ZONE
2
3
OFF
LEVEL
TONE
HDMI OUT
STEREO
THX
SETUP MIC
AUX
2
L
INPUT
TUNING
RT/PTY/TP MEMORY MODE
PHONES
POWER
SETUP
PRESET
CLEAR
ON
OFF
DIGITAL INPUT
LISTENING MODE
S
VIDEO
VIDEO
AUDIO
R
DIGITAL
ENTER
Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button, followed by the
TUNING
1
RECEIVER
[TUNER] button, and [SETUP]
button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
SETUP
ENTER
1
2
REMOTE MODE
DVD
VCR
CD
ZONE
2
CDR/MD
TV
CABLE
SAT
DOCK
RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
RECEIVER
ENTER
DIMMER
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select “4. Source
]
2
+
CH
ENTER
VOL
DISC
ALBUM
Setup,” and then press [ENTER].
The Source Setup menu appears.
-
ENTER
PREV
CH
DISPLAY
DISPLAY
MUTING
4.Source Setup
DVD
REC
PLAYLIST
RANDOM
1.IntelliVolume
2.A/V Sync
ENTER
3.Name Edit
4.Satellite Radio
5.SIRIUS Parental Lock
Displaying SIRIUS Satellite Radio
Information
Note:
If the Satellite Radio mode is set to
None (see page 68), the “4. Satellite
Radio” item is not available.
Press the [DISPLAY] button
repeatedly to cycle through the
available information.
AV controller
DISPLAY
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select “4. Satellite
]
3
Remote
controller
Radio,” and then press [ENTER].
The Satellite Radio screen appears.
The name of the currently selected
input selector is displayed in a box.
ENTER
DISPLAY
The following information can be displayed:
ENTER
Channel name
↓
Channel number & preset number
↓
Category
↓
Artist/composer
↓
Song title
↓
Listening mode
Note:
• If the category, artist/composer, or song title is not
available, “- - -” will be displayed instead.
73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Listening to the Radio—Continued
SIRIUS Satellite Radio Messages
Position the SiriusConnect Home
4
antenna so that as many bars as
possible (up to 3) appear on the
SIRIUS Satellite signal strength
meter.
The following messages may appear while using
SIRIUS Satellite Radio.
❑ ACQUIRING
The SiriusConnect receiver is acquiring the signal or
no signal is present. Make sure the SiriusConnect
Home tuner is connected properly and that there are
no obstacles close by.
4-4.SAT Radio
SIRIUS Antenna Aiming
❑ ANTENNA ERROR
Satellite
Terrestrial
Make sure the SiriusConnect Home tuner is con-
nected properly.
SIRIUS ID 000000000000
❑ SUB UPDATED
If you cannot receive a satellite signal,
position the SiriusConnect Home
antenna so that as many bars as possible
(up to 3) appear on the SIRIUS Terres-
trial signal strength meter.
Displayed while your subscription is being updated.
No operations can be performed until this message
has cleared.
❑ UPDATING XXX%
Displayed while the channel map is being updated.
Wait until the updating is complete.
Notes:
• So long as the signal strength is good, you can enjoy
SIRIUS Satellite Radio by using either satellite or ter-
restrial reception.
❑ UPDATING
Displayed while the SiriusConnect receiver’s firm-
ware is being updated.
• Terrestrial signals are only available in certain areas.
• The SIRIUS information on the Satellite Radio screen
is only displayed when the Satellite Radio mode is set
to SIRIUS or XM/SIRIUS (see page 68).
❑ INVALID CHANNEL
Displayed if you select an unavailable channel.
❑ CALL SIRIUS
• If you’re using both XM Satellite Radio and SIRIUS
Satellite Radio and the Satellite mode is set to
XM/SIRIUS (see page 68), signal strength meters for
both systems appear on the same screen.
Displayed when you select a channel to which you
are not subscribed. Call SIRIUS if you want to sub-
scribe.
❑ CHECK SR TUNER
Displayed if the SiriusConnect receiver is not con-
nected. Make sure the SiriusConnect receiver is con-
nected properly, and make sure its AC adapter is
plugged in.
74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Listening to the Radio—Continued
Selecting Presets
Presetting AM, FM, XM, and SIRIUS
Stations
PRESET
MASTER VOLUME
STANDBY/ON
2, 4
3
STANDBY
ZONE
2
3
ZONE
MASTER VOLUME
PURE AUDIO
AUDIO SEL
DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
GAME/TV
AUX
1
AUX
2
TAPE
TUNER
CD
PHONO
DISPLAY
STANDBY/ON
PUSH TO OPEN
TUNING
RETURN
ZONE
ZONE
2
3
OFF
LEVEL
TONE
HDMI OUT
STEREO
THX
SETUP MIC
AUX
2
L
INPUT
TUNING
PHONES
POWER
STANDBY
RT/PTY/TP MEMORY MODE
SETUP
PRESET
ZONE
ZONE
2
3
CLEAR
ON
OFF
VIDEO
AUDIO
R
DIGITAL
DIGITAL INPUT
LISTENING MODE
S
VIDEO
ENTER
TUNING
PURE AUDIO
AUDIO SEL
DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
GAME/TV
AUX
1
AUX
2
TAPE
TUNER
CD
PHONO
DISPLAY
PUSH TO OPEN
TUNING
PRESET
RETURN
ZONE
ZONE
2
3
OFF
LEVEL
TONE
HDMI OUT
STEREO
THX
SETUP MIC
AUX
2
L
INPUT
TUNING
PHONES
POWER
RT/PTY/TP MEMORY MODE
SETUP
TV
CLEAR
ON
OFF
DIGITAL INPUT
LISTENING MODE
S
VIDEO
VIDEO
AUDIO
R
DIGITAL
ENTER
TUNING
CABLE
SAT
SLEEP
DIMMER
You can store a combination of up to 40 of your favorite
AM, FM, XM, and SIRIUS radio stations.
+
CH
CH +/–
ENTER
VOL
DISC
ALBUM
-
Tune into the AM, FM, XM, or SIR-
IUS station you want to store as a
preset.
PREV
CH
1
MUTING
Press the [MEMORY] button.
The preset number flashes.
2
To select a preset, use the PRE-
SET [ ]/[ ] buttons or the
remote controller’s CH [+/–] but-
ton.
MEMORY
PRESET
+
While the preset number is flash-
CH
DISC
ALBUM
3
ing (about 8 seconds), use the
PRESET [ ]/[ ] buttons to
-
PRESET
select a preset from 1 through 40.
Press the [MEMORY] button
again to store the station.
4
MEMORY
Deleting Presets
The station is stored and the preset
number stops flashing.
2
favorite stations.
MASTER VOLUME
STANDBY/ON
STANDBY
ZONE
ZONE
2
3
Note:
• You can name your radio presets for easy identifica-
tion (see page 102).
PURE AUDIO
AUDIO SEL
DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
GAME/TV
AUX
1
AUX
2
TAPE
TUNER
CD
PHONO
DISPLAY
PUSH TO OPEN
TUNING
PRESET
RETURN
ZONE
ZONE
2
3
OFF
LEVEL
TONE
HDMI OUT
STEREO
THX
SETUP MIC
AUX
2
L
INPUT
TUNING
PHONES
POWER
RT/PTY/TP MEMORY MODE
SETUP
CLEAR
ON
OFF
DIGITAL INPUT
LISTENING MODE
S
VIDEO
VIDEO
AUDIO
R
DIGITAL
ENTER
TUNING
Select the preset that you want to
delete.
See the previous section.
1
2
While holding down the [MEM-
ORY] button, press the
TUNING
MEMORY MODE
[TUNING MODE] button.
The preset is deleted and its number
disappears from the display.
CLEAR
75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Common Functions
This section explains functions that can be used with any
input source.
Adjusting Speaker Levels
You can adjust the volume of each speaker while listen-
ing to an input source. These temporary adjustments are
cancelled when the AV controller is set to Standby.
TAPE
7
TUN
8
TV VOL
PHONO
D. TUN
+10
-- --- 10
/
CLEAR
0
11
12
INPUT SELECTOR
MACRO
Use the remote controller’s
Press
[RECEIVER]
first
ZONE
ZONE
3
2
1
2
3
REMOTE MODE
[CH SEL] button to select each
speaker, and use the [LEVEL–]
and [LEVEL+] buttons to adjust
the volume.
CH SEL
DVD
VCR
CD
CDR/MD
TV
CABLE
SAT
DOCK
RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
DIMMER
DIMMER
DISPLAY
SLEEP
You can adjust the volume of each
speaker from –12 dB to +12 dB
(–15 dB to +12 dB for the subwoofer).
+
LEVEL
LEVEL
CH
ENTER
VOL
DISC
ALBUM
-
PREV
CH
MUTING
DISPLAY
MUTING
REC
PLAYLIST
RANDOM
LISTENING MODE
SURR
Notes:
STEREO
• You cannot use this function while the AV controller
is muted.
REPEAT
AUDIO
DIRECT
SUBTITLE PLAY MODE
PURE
A
THX
ALL ST
-
+
LEVEL
TEST TONE
CH SEL
LEVEL
CH SEL
• Speakers that are set to No or None in the Speaker
Configuration cannot be adjusted (see page 94).
OPEN/CLOSE VIDEO OFF
LEVEL – +
AUDIO SEL
VCR
L
NIGHT
Re-EQ
HDD
DVD
RC-690
M
■ Headphones
While a pair of headphones is connected, you can use the
[CH SEL], [LEVEL–], and [LEVEL+] buttons to adjust
the volume of each headphone speaker (left and right),
from –12 dB to +12 dB each.
MASTER VOLUME
STANDBY/ON
STANDBY
ZONE
ZONE
2
3
PURE AUDIO
AUDIO SEL
DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
GAME/TV
AUX
1
AUX
2
TAPE
TUNER
CD
PHONO
DISPLAY
PUSH TO OPEN
TUNING
PRESET
RETURN
ZONE
ZONE
2
3
OFF
LEVEL
TONE
HDMI OUT
STEREO
THX
SETUP MIC
AUX
2
L
INPUT
TUNING
DIMMER MEMORY MODE
PHONES
SETUP
CLEAR
DIGITAL INPUT
LISTENING MODE
S
VIDEO
VIDEO
AUDIO
R
DIGITAL
ENTER
TUNING
These settings are stored when the AV controller is set to
Standby.
PHONES
DIMMER
DISPLAY
Muting the AV Controller
You can temporarily mute the output of the AV control-
ler.
Setting the Display Brightness
You can adjust the brightness of the display.
Press the remote controller’s
[MUTING] button.
The output is muted and the MUTING
indicator flashes on the display.
Press the remote controller’s
[DIMMER] button repeatedly to
Remote
controller
MUTING
DIMMER
select:
• Normal + VOLUME light on.
• Normal + VOLUME light off.
• Dim + VOLUME light off.
AV controller
DIMMER
• Dimmer + VOLUME light off.
To unmute the AV controller, press the remote control-
ler’s [MUTING] button again, or adjust the volume. The
You can also use the AV controller’s
[DIMMER] button.
Muting is cancelled when the AV controller is set to
Standby.
Tip:
You can specify how much the output is muted with the
Muting Level setting (see page 104).
76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Common Functions—Continued
Using the Sleep Timer
Displaying Source Information
With the sleep timer, you can set the AV controller so
that it turns off automatically after a specified period.
You can display various information about the current
input source as follows.
Remote
controller
Press the remote controller’s
Press the [DISPLAY] button
repeatedly to cycle through the
available information.
SLEEP
[SLEEP] button repeatedly to
select the required sleep time.
You can set the sleep time from 90 to 10
minutes in 10 minute steps.
DISPLAY
The SLEEP indicator appears on the
display when the sleep timer has been
set, as shown. The specified sleep time
appears on the display for about 5 sec-
onds, then the previous display reap-
pears.
AV controller
DISPLAY
The following information can typically be displayed:
SLEEP indicator
Input source
Listening
mode
Signal format*
To cancel the sleep timer, press the [SLEEP] button
repeatedly until the SLEEP indicator disappears.
To check the remaining sleep time, press the [SLEEP]
button. Note that if you press the [SLEEP] button while
the sleep time is being displayed, you’ll shorten the sleep
time by 10 minutes.
Sampling
frequency
* If the input signal is analog, no format information is
displayed. If the input signal is PCM, the sampling
frequency is displayed. If the input signal is digital but
not PCM, the signal format and the number of chan-
nels is displayed. For some digital input signals,
including multichannel PCM, the signal format, num-
ber of channels, and sampling frequency is displayed.
Information is displayed for about 3 seconds, then the
previous display reappears.
Using Headphones
For private listening, you can connect a pair of stereo
headphones (1/4-inch phone plug) to the AV controller’s
PHONES jack.
Notes:
• Always turn down the volume before connecting your
headphones.
• While the headphones plug is inserted in the PHONES
jack, the speakers are turned off and the Headphone
indicator lights up.
• When you connect a pair of headphones, the listening
mode is set to Stereo, unless it was already set to Pure
Audio, Mono, Stereo, or Direct, in which case it stays
the same.
77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Common Functions—Continued
Selecting Audio Inputs
Specifying the Digital Signal Format
1
2
REC
PLAYLIST
MASTER VOLUME
LISTENING MODE
SURR
STANDBY/ON
STEREO
REPEAT
AUDIO
DIRECT
SUBTITLE PLAY MODE
STANDBY
ZONE
2
3
PURE
A
THX
ALL ST
ZONE
-
+
LEVEL
TEST TONE
CH SEL
LEVEL
PURE AUDIO
AUDIO SEL
DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
GAME/TV
AUX
1
AUX
2
TAPE
TUNER
CD
PHONO
DISPLAY
PUSH TO OPEN
OPEN/CLOSE VIDEO OFF
TUNING
PRESET
RETURN
ZONE
ZONE
2
3
OFF
LEVEL
TONE
HDMI OUT
STEREO
THX
SETUP MIC
AUX
2
L
INPUT
TUNING
PHONES
POWER
AUDIO SEL
VCR
L
NIGHT
Re-EQ
HDD
RT/PTY/TP MEMORY MODE
SETUP
AUDIO SEL
DVD
CLEAR
ON
OFF
DIGITAL INPUT
LISTENING MODE
S
VIDEO
VIDEO
AUDIO
R
DIGITAL
ENTER
TUNING
RC-690
M
Normally, the AV controller detects the format of digital
input signals automatically. However, if you experience
either of the following issues when playing PCM or DTS
sources, you can specify the signal format manually.
• If the beginnings of tracks from a PCM source are cut
off, try the PCM setting.
If you connect a component to more than one audio
input, such as a DVD player connected to analog, digital,
multichannel, and HDMI inputs, you can use the
[AUDIO SEL] button to select which audio input you
want to use to listen to that component.
Press the [AUDIO SEL] button
• If noise is produced when fast forwarding or rewind-
ing a DTS CD, try the DTS setting.
repeatedly to select an audio
AUDIO SEL
input: HDMI > Auto > Multich >
Analog.
Press the [AUDIO SEL] button
repeatedly to select Auto.
1
IN, and the HDMI indicator
appears on the display. (The
HDMI IN must already be
assigned to the current input
selector. See page 47.)
Auto: Selects the assigned COAX-
IAL or OPTICAL DIGITAL
tor appears on the display.
(The DIGITAL IN must
AUDIO SEL
While“Auto”is shown on the dis-
play, use the Up [ ] and Down
2
[
] buttons to select:
PCM: Only input signals in PCM
format are output, and the
PCM indicator lights up. The
indicator flashes if the input
signal is not PCM.
already be assigned to the
current input selector. See
page 49.) If there is no digital
signal, the analog input is
used instead.
DTS: Only input signals in DTS
format are output, and the
DTS indicator lights up. The
indicator flashes if the input
signal is not DTS.
Multich:Selects the multichannel
cator appears on the display.
(The multichannel input must
already be assigned to the
current input selector. See
page 51.)
Auto(default):The format is detected
automatically. If no digital
input signal is present, the
analog input is used instead.
Analog: Selects the analog input, and
the ANALOG indicator
appears on the display.
You can also use the [AUDIO SEL]
button on the AV controller.
78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Selecting with the Remote Controller
Selecting the Listening Modes
For a description of each listening mode, see “About the
Listening Modes” on page 84.
+
CH
ENTER
VOL
DISC
ALBUM
-
PREV
• The Dolby Digital and DTS listening modes
can only be selected if your DVD player is
connected to the AV controller with a digital
audio connection (coaxial, optical, or HDMI).
CH
DISPLAY
MUTING
REC
PLAYLIST
RANDOM
• The listening modes you can select depends
on the format of the input signal. To check
the format, see “Displaying Source Informa-
tion” on page 77.
SURR
LISTENING MODE
SURR
,
STEREO
STEREO
PURE A
REPEAT
AUDIO
DIRECT
SUBTITLE PLAY MODE
PURE
A
THX
ALL ST
ALL ST
THX
-
+
LEVEL
TEST TONE
CH SEL
LEVEL
DIRECT
OPEN/CLOSE VIDEO OFF
• While a pair of headphones is connected,
you can only select the Pure Audio, Mono,
Direct, or Stereo listening mode.
AUDIO SEL
VCR
L
NIGHT
Re-EQ
HDD
DVD
RC-690
M
Selecting on the AV Controller
■ [STEREO] button
This button selects the Stereo listening mode.
STEREO
THX
■ [SURR] button
MASTER VOLUME
This button selects the Dolby Digital and DTS listen-
STANDBY/ON
ing modes.
STANDBY
ZONE
ZONE
2
3
■ LISTENING MODE [ ]/[ ] buttons
Pressing these buttons repeatedly cycles through all
of the listening modes that can be used with the cur-
rent input source.
PURE AUDIO
AUDIO SEL
DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
GAME/TV
AUX
1
AUX
2
TAPE
TUNER
CD
PHONO
DISPLAY
PUSH TO OPEN
TUNING
PRESET
RETURN
ZONE
ZONE
2
3
OFF
LEVEL
TONE
HDMI OUT
STEREO
THX
SETUP MIC
AUX
2
L
INPUT
TUNING
PHONES
POWER
RT/PTY/TP MEMORY MODE
SETUP
CLEAR
ON
OFF
DIGITAL INPUT
LISTENING MODE
S
VIDEO
VIDEO
AUDIO
R
DIGITAL
ENTER
TUNING
■ [PURE A] button
LISTENING MODE
PURE AUDIO
This button selects the Pure Audio listening mode.
When this mode is selected, the AV controller’s dis-
play is turned off and only the HDMI outputs output
video signals.
■ [PURE AUDIO] button
This button selects the Pure Audio listening mode.
When this mode is selected, the AV controller’s dis-
play is turned off and only the HDMI outputs output
video signals. Pressing this button again will select
the previous listening mode.
■ [DIRECT] button
This button selects the Direct listening mode.
■ [THX] button
■ [STEREO] button
This button selects the THX listening modes.
This button selects the Stereo listening mode.
■ [ALL ST] button
■ [THX] button
This button selects the All Channel Stereo listening
mode.
This button selects the THX listening modes.
■ LISTENING MODE [ ]/[ ] buttons
Pressing these buttons repeatedly cycles through all
of the listening modes that can be used with the cur-
rent input source.
79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Listening Modes—Continued
Listening Modes Available for Each Source Format
Analog and PCM Sources
PCM
Multi
Multichannel PCM
32–96 kHz
*/2
176.4/192 kHz*1
Source format
channel
analog
176.4/
192 kHz*1
32–96
kHz
except */2
2ch 1/0, 1+1 Multichannel
2ch
Media
CD, TV, radio,
DVD
DVD DVD
Button
Listening Mode
[PURE A] Pure Audio
[DIRECT] Direct
[STEREO] Stereo
Multichannel
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Dolby D
Dolby D Plus
DTS, DTS 96/24
DTS-ES Discrete/Matrix
DTS-HD High Resolution
DTS-HD Master Audio
Dolby TrueHD
DSD
Dolby PLII Movie/
Dolby PLIIx Movie*2
Dolby PLII Music/
Dolby PLIIx Music*2
Dolby PLII Game/
Dolby PLIIx Game*2
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
[SURR]
Dolby Digital EX/Dolby EX
Neo:6
✔
✔
Neo:6 Cinema
Neo:6 Music
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Neural THX 5.1
Neural THX 7.1
THX Cinema*3
Dolby PLII/
Dolby PLIIx THX*3
✔
✔
✔
✔*2
✔
✔
✔
✔*3
✔
Neo:6 THX*3
✔
✔
✔
Dolby PLII THX Games
Mode
[THX]
Neo:6 THX Games Mode
THX Surround EX
THX Ultra2 Cinema
THX Music Mode
THX Games Mode
Mono
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Mono Movie
Orchestra
3
*
Unplugged
Studio-Mix
TV Logic
All Ch Stereo
Full Mono
T-D
✔
*1. DVD-Audio discs output multichannel 176.4/192 kHz PCM only via HDMI.
*2. If there are no surround back speakers, Dolby Pro Logic II is used.
*3. Available only when using surround speakers.
*4. For T-D, Mono Movie, Orchestra, Unplugged, Studio-Mix, and TV Logic, PCM of 64 kHz, 88.2 kHz, and 96 kHz are processed at 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz,
and 88.2 kHz respectively.
Requires 6.1/7.1 speakers.
Requires 7.1 speakers.
80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Listening Modes—Continued
DSD, Dolby Digital, and Dolby Digital Plus Sources
DSD*1
Dolby D
Multichannel
Dolby Digital Plus
Multichannel
Multichannel
Source format
2ch 1/0, 1+1
2ch 1/0, 1+1
except
*/2
except
*/2
3/2
2ch
SACD
*/2
*/2
Media
DVD, DTV, etc.
Blu-ray, HD DVD
Button
Listening Mode
[PURE A] Pure Audio
[DIRECT] Direct
[STEREO] Stereo
Multichannel
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
*2
✔
✔*2
✔
✔
Dolby D
✔
✔
*3
✔*3
Dolby D Plus
✔
DTS, DTS 96/24
DTS-ES Discrete/Matrix
DTS-HD High Resolution
DTS-HD Master Audio
Dolby TrueHD
DSD
✔
✔
Dolby PLII Movie/
Dolby PLIIx Movie*4
Dolby PLII Music/
Dolby PLIIx Music*4
Dolby PLII Game/
Dolby PLIIx Game*4
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
[SURR]
✔
Dolby Digital EX/Dolby EX
Neo:6
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Neo:6 Cinema
Neo:6 Music
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Neural THX 5.1
Neural THX 7.1
THX Cinema*5
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Dolby PLII/
Dolby PLIIx THX
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Neo:6 THX
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Dolby PLIITHX Games Mode
Neo:6 THX Games Mode
THX Surround EX
THX Ultra2 Cinema
THX Music Mode
THX Games Mode
Mono
[THX]
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Mono Movie
Orchestra
5
*
Unplugged
Studio-Mix
TV Logic
All Ch Stereo
Full Mono
T-D
✔
✔
✔
*1. In listening modes other than DSD Direct and Pure Audio, DSD sources are converted and handled as PCM.
*2. With the Delay Enable DSD setting on the Direct screen set to No (see page 91), if the source is DSD, the Direct listening mode becomes DSD Direct,
“DSD Direct” appears on the display, and the Speaker Configuration settings are ignored.
*3. If there are no surround back speakers, depending on the input signal, Dolby Digital may be used.
*4. If there are no surround back speakers, Dolby Pro Logic II is used.
*5. Available only when using surround speakers.
Requires 6.1/7.1 speakers.
Requires 7.1 speakers.
81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Listening Modes—Continued
TrueHD and DTS Sources
TrueHD*1
DTS, DTS96/24
Multichannel
DTS-ES
Discrete/
Matrix
Multichannel
Source format
2ch
1/0, 1+1
2ch
1/0
except
*/2
except
*/2
*/2
*/2
Media
Blu-ray, HD DVD
DVD, CD, etc.
Button
Listening Mode
[PURE A] Pure Audio
[DIRECT] Direct
[STEREO] Stereo
Multichannel
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Dolby D
Dolby D Plus
DTS, DTS 96/24
✔
✔
*2
DTS-ES Discrete/Matrix
✔
DTS-HD High Resolution
DTS-HD Master Audio
TrueHD
✔
✔
DSD
Dolby PLII Movie/
Dolby PLIIx Movie*3
Dolby PLII Music/
Dolby PLIIx Music*3
Dolby PLII Game/
Dolby PLIIx Game*3
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
[SURR]
Dolby Digital EX/Dolby EX
Neo:6
✔
✔
✔
✔
Neo:6 Cinema
Neo:6 Music
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Neural THX 5.1
Neural THX 7.1
THX Cinema*4
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Dolby PLII/
Dolby PLIIx THX
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Neo:6 THX
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Dolby PLII THX Games Mode
Neo:6 THX Games Mode
THX Surround EX
THX Ultra2 Cinema
THX Music Mode
THX Games Mode
Mono
[THX]
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Mono Movie
Orchestra
4
*
Unplugged
Studio-Mix
TV Logic
All Ch Stereo
Full Mono
T-D
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
*1. 192 kHz TrueHD sources are processed as 192 kHz 2-channel audio, regardless of the number of channels.
*2. If there are no surround back speakers, DTS is used.
*3. If there are no surround back speakers, Dolby Pro Logic II is used.
*4. Available only when using surround speakers.
*5. For T-D, Mono Movie, Orchestra, Unplugged, Studio-Mix, and TV Logic, DTS 96/24 is processed as DTS.
Requires 6.1/7.1 speakers.
Requires 7.1 speakers.
82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Listening Modes—Continued
DTS-HD Sources
DTS-HD Master Audio*1
Multichannel
DTS-HD High Resolution
Multichannel
except */2 */2
Source format
2ch
1/0
2ch
1/0
except */2
*/2
Media
Blu-ray, HD DVD
Blu-ray, HD DVD
Button
Listening Mode
[PURE A] Pure Audio
[DIRECT] Direct
[STEREO] Stereo
Multichannel
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Dolby D
Dolby D Plus
DTS, DTS 96/24
DTS-ES Discrete/Matrix
DTS-HD High Resolution
DTS-HD Master Audio
TrueHD
✔
✔
✔
✔
DSD
Dolby PLII Movie/
Dolby PLIIx Movie*2
Dolby PLII Music/
Dolby PLIIx Music*2
Dolby PLII Game/
Dolby PLIIx Game*2
*3
*3
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
[SURR]
*3
*3
*3
*3
*3
Dolby Digital EX/Dolby EX
Neo:6
✔
✔
✔
✔
*3
*3
Neo:6 Cinema
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Neo:6 Music
Neural THX 5.1
Neural THX 7.1
THX Cinema*2
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Dolby PLII/
Dolby PLIIx THX
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Neo:6 THX
Dolby PLII THX Games
Mode
[THX]
Neo:6 THX Games Mode
THX Surround EX
THX Ultra2 Cinema
THX Music Mode
THX Games Mode
Mono
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
*3
*3
*3
*3
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Mono Movie
Orchestra
Unplugged
Studio-Mix
TV Logic
All Ch Stereo
Full Mono
T-D
*4
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
*1. 192 kHz DTS-HD Master Audio sources are processed at 96 kHz.
*2. If there are no surround back speakers, Dolby Pro Logic II is used.
*3. Depending on the source (e.g., 96 kHz sources), processing may be performed after DTS decoding.
*4. Available only when using surround speakers.
Requires 6.1/7.1 speakers.
Requires 7.1 speakers.
83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Listening Modes—Continued
Dolby Digital
About the Listening Modes
Use this mode with DVDs that bear the Dolby Digital
logo and Dolby Digital TV broadcasts. This is the most
common digital surround-sound format, and it’ll put you
right in the middle of the action, just like being in a
movie theater or concert hall.
The AV controller’s listening modes can transform your
listening room into a movie theater or concert hall, with
high fidelity and stunning surround sound.
Dolby EX
Pure Audio
This mode expands 5.1-channel sources for 6.1/7.1-
channel playback. It’s especially suited to Dolby Digital
EX soundtracks that include a matrix-encoded surround
back channel. The additional channel adds an extra
dimension and provides an enveloping surround sound
experience, perfect for rotating and fly-by sound effects.
In this mode, the display and video circuitry are turned
off, minimizing possible noise sources for the ultimate in
high-fidelity audio reproduction. (As the video circuitry
is turned off, only the HDMI outputs output video.)
Note:
• The Pure Audio listening mode cannot be selected
while Zone 2 is on.
Dolby Digital Plus
Developed for use with HDTV, including the new video
disc formats Blu-ray and HD DVD, this is the latest mul-
tichannel audio format from Dolby. It supports up to 7.1
channels with 48 kHz/24-bit sampling rate and signal
resolution.
Direct
In this mode, audio from the input source is output
directly with minimal processing, providing high-fidel-
ity reproduction. All of the source’s audio channels are
output as they are.
Dolby TrueHD
Designed to take full advantage of the additional storage
space offered by the new Blu-ray and HD DVD disc for-
mats, this new Dolby format offers up to 7.1 discrete
channels of lossless audio performance with 96 kHz/24-
bit sampling rate and signal resolution.
Stereo
Sound is output by the front left and right speakers.
Mono
Use this mode when watching an old movie with a mono
soundtrack, or use it with the foreign language
soundtracks recorded in the left and right channels of
some movies. It can also be used with DVDs or other
sources containing multiplexed audio, such as karaoke
DVDs.
The AV controller supports 7.1-channel sources up to
96 kHz and 2-channel sources up to 192 kHz.
DTS NEO:6
This mode expands any 2-channel source for 7.1-chan-
nel playback. It uses seven full-bandwidth channels of
matrix decoding for matrix-encoded material, providing
a very natural and seamless surround sound experience
that fully envelops the listener.
Multichannel
This mode is for use with analog or PCM multichannel
sources.
• NEO:6 Cinema
Use this mode with any stereo movie (e.g., TV,
DVD, VHS).
Dolby Pro Logic IIx
• NEO:6 Music
Use this mode with any stereo music source (e.g.,
CD, radio, cassette, TV, VHS, DVD).
This mode expands any 2-channel source for 7.1-chan-
nel playback. It provides a very natural and seamless sur-
round-sound experience that fully envelops the listener.
As well as music and movies, video games can also ben-
efit from the dramatic spatial effects and vivid imaging.
If you’re not using any surround back speakers, Dolby
Pro Logic II will be used instead of Dolby Pro Logic IIx.
• Dolby PLIIx Movie
DTS
The DTS digital surround-sound format supports up to
5.1 discrete channels and uses less compression for high-
fidelity reproduction. Use it with DVDs and CDs that
bear the DTS logo.
Use this mode with any stereo or Dolby Surround
(Pro Logic) movie (e.g., TV, DVD, VHS).
• Dolby PLIIx Music
Use this mode with any stereo or Dolby Surround
(Pro Logic) music source (e.g., CD, radio, cassette,
TV, VHS, DVD).
DTS 96/24
This mode is for use with DTS 96/24 sources. This is
high-resolution DTS with a 96 kHz sampling rate and
24-bit resolution, providing superior fidelity. Use it with
DVDs that bear the DTS 96/24 logo.
• Dolby PLIIx Game
Use this mode with video games, especially those
that bear the Dolby Pro Logic II logo.
84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Listening Modes—Continued
DTS-ES Discrete
THX
This mode is for use with DTS-ES Discrete soundtracks
that use a discrete surround-back channel for true
6.1/7.1-channel playback. The seven totally separate
audio channels provide better spatial imaging and 360-
degree sound localization, perfect for sounds that pan
across the surround channels. Use it with DVDs that bear
the DTS-ES logo, especially those with a DTS-ES Dis-
crete soundtrack.
Founded by George Lucas, THX develops stringent stan-
dards that ensure movies are reproduced in movie the-
aters and home theaters just as the director intended.
• THX Cinema
This mode is for watching movies, which are typi-
cally recorded and edited on the assumption that they
will be played in a sizable place like a movie theater.
It carefully optimizes the tonal and spatial character-
istics of the soundtrack for reproduction in the
smaller home-theater environment. It can be used
with 2-channel sources processed with other for-
mats, and multichannel sources. Surround back
speaker output depends on the source material and
the selected listening mode.
DTS-ES Matrix
This mode is for use with DTS-ES Matrix soundtracks
that use a matrix-encoded back-channel for 6.1/7.1-
channel playback. Use it with DVDs that bear the DTS-
ES logo.
DTS-HD High Resolution
• THX Ultra2 Cinema
Developed for use with HDTV, including the new video
disc formats Blu-ray and HD DVD, this is the latest mul-
tichannel audio format from DTS. It supports up to 7.1
channels with 96 kHz/24-bit sampling rate and signal
resolution.
This mode expands 5.1-channel sources for 7.1-
channel playback. It does this by analyzing the com-
position of the surround source, optimizing the
ambient and directional sounds to produce the sur-
round back channel output.
DTS-HD Master Audio
• THX Music Mode
Designed to take full advantage of the additional storage
space offered by the new Blu-ray and HD DVD disc for-
mats, this new DTS format offers up to 7.1 discrete chan-
nels of uncompressed digital audio with 96 kHz/24-bit
sampling rate and signal resolution.
This mode is designed for use with music. It expands
5.1-channel sources for 7.1-channel playback.
• THX Games Mode
This mode is designed for use with video games. It
can expand 2-channel and 5.1-channel sources for
6.1/7.1-channel playback.
The AV controller supports 7.1-channel sources up to
96 kHz and 5.1-channel sources up to 192 kHz.
• THX Surround EX
This mode expands 5.1-channel sources for 6.1/7.1-
channel playback. It’s especially suited to Dolby
Digital EX sources. THX Surround EX, also known
as Dolby Digital Surround EX, is a joint develop-
ment between Dolby Laboratories and THX Ltd.
Neural THX 5.1/7.1
Neural-THX Surround employs psychoacoustic fre-
quency domain processing, which allows delivery of a
more detailed sound stage, with superior channel separa-
tion and localization of audio elements. The Neural THX
5.1 and Neural THX 7.1 modes can expand any 2-chan-
nel stereo source for 5.1- or 7.1-channel playback,
respectively. Use them with CD, radio, cassette, TV,
VHS, DVD, and other 2-channel stereo sources, includ-
ing video games. Neural-THX Surround can also be
used by broadcasters to encode and transmit surround-
sound content over a stereo signal, which listeners can
enjoy as either surround sound or normal stereo. XM
Satellite Radio, for example, is using Neural-THX Sur-
round on select channels, which the AV controller can
expand from 5.1 channels to 7.1 channels.
DSD
DSD stands for Direct Stream Digital and is the format
used to store digital audio on SuperAudio CDs (SACD).
This mode can be used with SACDs that feature multi-
channel audio.
85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Listening Modes—Continued
Onkyo Original DSP Modes
Mono Movie
This mode is suitable for old movies and other mono
sources. The center speaker outputs the sound as it is,
while reverb is applied to the sound output by the other
speakers, giving presence to even mono material.
Orchestra
Suitable for classical or operatic music, this mode
emphasizes the surround channels in order to widen the
stereo image and simulates the natural reverberation of a
large hall.
Unplugged
Suitable for acoustic instruments, vocals, and jazz, this
mode emphasizes the front stereo image, giving the
impression of being right in front of the stage.
Studio-Mix
Suitable for rock or pop music, listening to music in this
mode creates a lively sound field with a powerful acous-
tic image, like being at a club or rock concert.
TV Logic
This mode adds realistic acoustics to TV shows pro-
duced in a TV studio, surround effects to the entire
sound, and clarity to voices.
All Ch Stereo
Ideal for background music, this mode fills the entire lis-
tening area with stereo sound from the front, surround,
and surround back speakers.
Full Mono
In this mode, all speakers output the same sound in
mono, so the sound you hear is the same regardless of
where you are within the listening room.
T-D (Theater-Dimensional)
With this mode, you can enjoy virtual 5.1 surround
sound even with only two or three speakers. It works by
controlling how sounds reach the listener’s left and right
ears. Good results may not be possible if there’s too
much reverb, so we recommend that you use this mode
in an environment with little or no natural reverb.
Note:
• Since the Onkyo original DSP modes use the Dolby
PLIIx and Neo:6 circuits for processing, when one of
these modes is selected, the PLIIx indicator, or Neo:6
indicator for multichannel sources, lights up.
86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording
This section explains how to record the input source and
how to record audio and video from separate sources.
Recording from Different AV Sources
You can overdub audio onto your video recordings by
simultaneously recording audio and video from two sep-
arate sources. This is possible because only the audio
source is switched when an audio-only input source,
such as TAPE, TUNER, or CD, is selected, the video
source remains the same.
In the following example, audio from the CD player con-
nected to the CD IN and video from the camcorder con-
nected to the AUX 2 INPUT VIDEO jack are recorded
by the VCR connected to the VCR/DVR OUT jacks.
Notes:
• The surround sound and DSP listening modes cannot
be recorded.
• Copy-protected DVDs cannot be recorded.
• Sources connected to the analog multichannel input
cannot be recorded.
• Various restrictions apply to digital recording. Refer to
the manuals supplied with your digital recording
equipment for more details.
• Digital input signals are output by only the digital out-
puts, and analog input signals are output by only the
analog outputs. There is no internal conversion from
digital to analog or vice versa.
PUSH TO OPEN
AUX
2
INPUT
VIDEO
L
AUDIO
R
S
VIDEO
DIGITAL
• DTS signals will be recorded as noise, so don’t
attempt analog recording of DTS CDs or LDs.
• While the Pure Audio listening mode is selected, the
VCR/DVR OUT V and S jacks don’t output video sig-
nals, so select another mode when recording.
Camcorder
video signal
audio signal
Recording the Input Source
HDMI
ASSIGNABLE
RS232
OUT
OUT
SUB
IN
4
IN
3
IN
2
IN
1
MAIN
XM
MONITOR OUT
/ZONE OUT
2
Audio sources can be recorded to a recorder (e.g., cas-
sette deck, CDR, MD) connected to the TAPE OUT or
DIGITAL OPTICAL OUT jacks. Video sources can be
recorded to a video recorder (e.g., VCR, DVR) con-
nected to the VCR/DVR OUT jacks. See pages 26 to 42
for hookup information.
ASSIGNABLE
MONITOR
OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN IN IN 1(DVD)
SIRIUS
2
3
2
1
Y
MONITOR
OUT
AUX
1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT
VCR/DVR
DVD
V
V
REMOTE
C
C
B/PB
ZONE
OUT
2
IN
CONTROL
ASSIGNABLE
COAXIAL
DIGITAL
IN
1
(DVD)
R/PR
S
FRONT CENTER
S
S
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
(VCR/DVR)
IN
IN
IN
IN
2
3
1
2
L
L
(CBL/SAT)
R
R
OPTICAL
SUBWOOFER
CD
TAPE
AUX
1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT
VCR/DVR
FRONT
DVD
M
PHONO
(GAME/TV)
(CD)
GND
2
BALANCE
MONO
L
SURR BACK
Bi-AMP
R
BALANCE
R
SURR
R
R
CENTER
FRON
1
3
OUT
HOT GND
COLD
INPUT
Use the input selector buttons to
select the source that you want
to record.
1
DVD
VCR/DVR CBL/SAT
CD player
VCR
See “Which Connections Should I
Use?” on page 27 to see which signals
can be output and recorded.
GAME/TV
TAPE
AUX 1
AUX 2
CD
TUNER
Prepare the camcorder and CD player for
playback.
You can watch the source while record-
ing it. The AV controller’s MASTER
VOLUME control has no effect on
recording.
PHONO
1
Remote
controller
Prepare the VCR for recording.
DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
2
3
4
1
GAME/TV
4
2
AUX1
5
3
AUX
6
2
Press the [AUX 2] input selector button.
Press the [CD] input selector button.
This selects the CD player as the audio source but
leaves the camcorder as the video source.
TAPE
7
TUNER
8
CD
9
PHONO
+10
On your recorder, start record-
ing.
2
Start recording on the VCR, then start
playback on the camcorder and CD player.
Video from the camcorder and audio from the CD
player are recorded by the VCR.
5
On the source component, start
playback.
3
Note:
• If you select a different input source during recording,
that input source will be recorded instead.
87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Onscreen Setup Menus
The onscreen setup menus appear on the connected TV and provide a conve-
nient way to change the AV controller’s various settings. Settings are orga-
nized into eight categories on the main menu, most containing a submenu.
Menu
1.Input/Output Assign
2.Speaker Setup
3.Audio Adjust
4.Source Setup
5.ListeningMode Preset
6.Miscellaneous
7.Hardware Setup
8.Lock Setup
Menu Map
The following map shows how the setup menus are organized. Use the page numbers to locate information about items.
Main menu
Submenu
☞ pages 45–51
Menu
1.Input/Output Assign
2.Speaker Setup
3.Audio Adjust
1.Input/Output Assign
1.Monitor Out
2.HDMI Input
3.Component Video Input
4.Digital Input
5.Analog Input
4.Source Setup
5.Listening Mode Preset
6.Miscellaneous
7.Hardware Setup
8.Lock Setup
☞ pages 94–100
2.Speaker Setup
1.Speaker Settings
2.Speaker Config
3.Speaker Distance
4.Level Calibration
5.Equalizer Settings
6.THX Audio Setup
☞ page 104
6.Miscellaneous
2.OSD Setup
page 44
☞ page 90
3.Audio Adjust
1.Tone Control
2.Direct
3.Multiplex/Mono
4.PL x/Neo:6
5.Dolby EX
☞ page 106
7.Hardware Setup
1.Remote Control
2.Zone2/Zone3
3.Tuner
6.Theater-Dimensional
7.LFE Level
4.Analog Multich
5.HDMI
☞ pages 101–102
4.Source Setup
DVD
1.IntelliVolume
2.A/V Sync
3.Name Edit
4.Satellite Radio
5.SIRIUS Parental Lock
☞ page 108
8.Lock Setup
Lock
Unlocked
☞ page 92
5.Listening Mode Preset
1.DVD
2.VCR/DVR
3.CBL/SAT
4.GAME/TV
5.AUX1
6.AUX2
7.TAPE
8.TUNER
9.CD
10.PHONO
88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjusting the Listening Modes
Using the Late Night Function
With the Late Night function, you can reduce the
dynamic range of Dolby Digital material so that you can
still hear quiet parts even when listening at low volume
levels—ideal for watching movies late at night when you
don’t want to disturb anyone.
ON
STANDBY
TV
INPUT
DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
3
+
TV CH
-
1
GAME/TV
4
2
AUX1
5
AUX
6
2
TAPE
7
TUNER
8
CD
9
TV VOL
PHONO
D. TUN
+10
-- --- 10
/
INPUT SELECTOR
MACRO
CLEAR
12
0
Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button, and then press the
[L NIGHT] button repeatedly.
For Dolby Digital and Dolby Digital
Plus sources, the options are:
11
RECEIVER
ZONE
ZONE
3
2
1
2
3
REMOTE MODE
DVD
VCR
CD
CDR/MD
TV
CABLE
SAT
DOCK
RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
RECEIVER
DIMMER
L NIGHT
Off: Late Night function off
(default).
Low: Small reduction in dynamic
+
ENTER
SETUP
CH
ENTER
VOL
DISC
ALBUM
-
range.
PREV
CH
High: Large reduction in dynamic
DISPLAY
MUTING
range.
REC
PLAYLIST
RANDOM
For Dolby TrueHD sources, the options
are:
LISTENING MODE
SURR
STEREO
Auto: The dynamic range is con-
trolled automatically based
on the source material and the
current volume setting
REPEAT
AUDIO
DIRECT
SUBTITLE PLAY MODE
PURE
A
THX
ALL ST
-
+
LEVEL
TEST TONE
CH SEL
LEVEL
OPEN/CLOSE VIDEO OFF
AUDIO SEL
VCR
L
NIGHT
Re-EQ
HDD
Re-EQ
DVD
(default).
L NIGHT
RC-690
M
Off: Late Night function off.
On: Late Night function on.
Notes:
• The Late Night function can be used only when the
input source is Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, or
Dolby TrueHD.
Using the Re-EQ Function
With the Re-EQ function, you can compensate a
soundtrack whose high-frequency content is too harsh,
making it more suitable for home theater viewing.
• The effect of the Late Night function depends on the
material that you are playing and the intention of the
original sound designer, and with some material there
will be little or no effect when you select the different
options.
This function can be used with the following listening
modes: Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital EX, Dolby Pro
Logic II Movie, Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie, DTS, DTS-
ES, DTS Neo:6 Cinema, DTS 96/24, THX Cinema,
THX Surround EX, THX Ultra2 Cinema, and Multi-
channel.
• The Late Night function is set to Off when the AV con-
troller is set to Standby. For Dolby TrueHD sources, it
will be set to Auto.
Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button, followed by the
RECEIVER
[Re-EQ] button.
Press the [Re-EQ] button again to turn
off the Re-EQ function.
Re-EQ
89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjusting the Listening Modes—Continued
Tone Control Settings
Audio Adjust
You can adjust the tone (bass and treble) of the front,
center, surround, and surround back speakers individu-
ally. For the subwoofer, you can adjust the bass.
With the Audio Adjust functions and settings, you can
adjust the sound and listening modes as you like.
Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button, followed by the
[SETUP] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
1
■ Bass
RECEIVER
You can boost or cut low-frequency sounds from –10 dB
to +10 dB in 1 dB steps.
■ Treble
You can boost or cut high-frequency sounds from
–10 dB to +10 dB in 1 dB steps.
Note:
• The tone control circuits are bypassed when the Direct
or Pure Audio listening mode is selected.
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select “3. Audio
]
2
Adjust,” and then press [ENTER].
The Audio Adjust menu appears.
ENTER
Adjusting the Tone on the AV Controller
3.Audio Adjust
1
2
1.Tone Control
2.Direct
MASTER VOLUME
3.Multiplex/Mono
4.PL x/Neo:6
5.Dolby EX
STANDBY/ON
ENTER
STANDBY
ZONE
ZONE
2
3
6.Theater-Dimensional
7.LFE Level
PURE AUDIO
AUDIO SEL
DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
GAME/TV
AUX
1
AUX
2
TAPE
TUNER
CD
PHONO
DISPLAY
PUSH TO OPEN
TUNING
PRESET
RETURN
ZONE
ZONE
2
3
OFF
LEVEL
TONE
HDMI OUT
STEREO
THX
SETUP MIC
AUX
2
L
INPUT
TUNING
PHONES
POWER
RT/PTY/TP MEMORY MODE
SETUP
CLEAR
ON
OFF
DIGITAL INPUT
LISTENING MODE
S
VIDEO
VIDEO
AUDIO
R
DIGITAL
ENTER
TUNING
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select an item, and
then press [ENTER].
]
3
4
Press the AV controller’s [TONE]
button repeatedly to select Bass
or Treble for Front, Center, Sur-
round, SurrBack, or Subwoofer.
1
2
ENTER
TONE
The screen for that item appears.
ENTER
Use the Up [ ] and Down [
buttons to adjust.
]
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select an option, and
]
use the Left and Right [ ]/[
buttons to change it.
The Audio Adjust menu items are
explained below.
]
ENTER
Notes:
• The tone cannot be adjusted on the AV controller
when the Direct or Pure Audio listening mode is
selected.
• The tone control settings do not apply to the THX lis-
tening modes.
ENTER
When you’ve finished, press the
[SETUP] button.
5
Setup closes.
90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjusting the Listening Modes—Continued
Direct Setting
PLIIx/Neo:6 Settings
Delay Enable
PLIIx Music (2 ch Input)
These settings apply to only 2-channel stereo sources.
■ DSD
If you’re not using any surround back speakers, these
settings apply to Dolby Pro Logic II, not Dolby Pro
Logic IIx.
This setting determines whether or not DSD (SACD)
audio signals are passed through the DSP for A/V Sync,
delay, etc., processing when the Direct listening mode is
selected.
■ Panorama
No: DSD signals are not processed by the DSP.
Yes: DSD signals are processed by the DSP.
With this setting, you can broaden the width of the front
stereo image when using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music
listening mode.
On: Panorama function on.
Off: Panorama function off (default).
Multiplex/Mono Settings
Multiplex
■ Dimension
With this setting, you can move the sound field forward
or backward when using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music
listening mode. It can be adjusted from –3 to +3. The
default value is 0. Higher settings move the sound field
forward. Lower settings move it backward.
■ Input Ch
This setting determines which channel of a stereo multi-
plex source is output. Use it to select audio channels or
languages with multiplex sources, multilingual TV
broadcasts, and so on.
If the stereo image feels too wide, or there’s too much
surround sound, move the sound field forward to
improve the balance. Conversely, if the stereo image
feels like it’s in mono, or there’s not enough surround
sound, move it backward.
Main: The main channel is output (default).
Sub: The sub channel is output.
Main/Sub: Both the main and sub channels are out-
put.
■ Center Width
Mono
With this setting, you can adjust the width of the sound
from the center speaker when using the Dolby Pro Logic
IIx Music listening mode. Normally, if you’re using a
center speaker, the center channel sound is output by
only the center speaker. (If you’re not using a center
speaker, the center channel sound will be distributed to
the front left and right speakers to create a phantom cen-
ter). This setting controls the front left, right, and center
mix, allowing you to adjust the weight of the center
channel sound. It can be adjusted from 0 to 7. The default
value is 3.
■ Input Ch
This setting determines which channel is output when
the Mono listening mode is used with a stereo source.
L+R: Both the left and right channels are output
(default).
L: Only the left channel is output.
R: Only the right channel is output.
■ Output Speaker
This setting determines which speakers output mono
audio when the Mono listening mode is selected.
L/R: Mono audio is output by the front left and right
Neo:6 Music
speakers.
■ Center Image
C: Mono audio is output by the center speaker
The DTS Neo:6 Music listening mode creates 6-channel
surround sound from 2-channel stereo sources. With this
setting, you can specify by how much the front left and
right channel output is attenuated in order to create the
center channel. It can be adjusted from 0 to 5. The
default value is 3.
(default).
When set to 0, the front left and right channel output is
attenuated by half (–6 dB), giving the impression that the
sound is located centrally. This setting works well when
the listening position is considerably off center. When
set to 5, the front left and right channels are not attenu-
ated, maintaining the original stereo balance.
91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjusting the Listening Modes—Continued
■ DSD
Dolby Digital Settings
Sets the level of the LFE channel for DSD sources.
■ Dolby EX
This setting determines how Dolby EX signals are han-
dled.
■ Multich PCM
Sets the level of the LFE channel for multichannel PCM
sources. (Multichannel PCM is input via HDMI.)
Auto: When the source is Dolby EX, you can select
the Dolby EX or THX Surround EX listening
mode.
Manual:When the source is Dolby EX, you can select
any of the listening modes compatible with this
format (e.g., Dolby EX, Dolby Pro Logic IIx,
etc.).
Listening Mode Presets
On the Listening Mode Preset menu, you can specify a
default listening mode for each of the audio formats sup-
ported by each input selector. The AV controller will
then select the listening mode automatically depending
on the format of the input signal. You can still select the
other listening modes, although the default listening
mode will be used the next time you turn on the AV con-
troller.
T–D (Theater-Dimensional) Setting
■ Listening Angle
INPUT SELECTOR
MA
1
2
With this setting, you can optimize the Theater-Dimen-
sional listening mode by specifying the angle of the front
left and right speakers relative to the listening position.
Ideally, the front left and right speakers should be equi-
distant from the listening position and at an angle close
to one of the two available settings.
REMOTE MODE
DVD
VCR
CD
ZONE
2
CDR/MD
TV
CABLE
SAT
DOCK
RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
RECEIVER
DIMMER
+
CH
ENTER
SETUP
ENTER
VOL
DISC
ALBUM
Front left speaker
Front right speaker
-
PREV
CH
DISPLAY
MUTING
30˚
Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button, followed by the
[SETUP] button.
1
RECEIVER
Narrow:Select if the angle is less than 30 degrees.
Wide: Select if the angle is greater than 30 degrees.
The main menu appears onscreen.
LFE Level Settings
With these settings, you can set the level of the LFE
(Low Frequency Effects) channel individually for Dolby
Digital, DTS, and multichannel PCM sources. The level
can be set to –∞, –20 dB, –10 dB, or 0 dB (default).
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
]
2
buttons to select “5. Listening
Mode Preset,” and then press
[ENTER].
The Listening Mode Preset menu
appears.
ENTER
If you find that low-frequency effects are too loud when
using one of these sources, change the setting to –20 dB
or –∞ dB.
5.Listening Mode Preset
■ Dolby Digital
Sets the level of the LFE channel for Dolby Digital
sources.
1.DVD
ENTER
2.VCR/DVR
3.CBL/SAT
4.GAME/TV
5.AUX1
6.AUX2
7.TAPE
■ DTS
Sets the level of the LFE channel for DTS sources.
8.TUNER
9.CD
10.PHONO
■ Dolby TrueHD
Sets the level of the LFE channel for Dolby TrueHD
sources.
■ DTS-HD Master Audio
Sets the level of the LFE channel for DTS-HD Master
Audio sources.
92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjusting the Listening Modes—Continued
Dolby TrueHD: Specifies the default
listening mode for Dolby TrueHD
sources, such as Blu-ray or HD DVD
(input via HDMI).
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
]
3
buttons to select an input selec-
tor, and then press [ENTER].
The audio formats supported by that
input selector appear.
ENTER
DTS-HD Master Audio: Specifies the
default listening mode for DTS-HD
Master Audio sources, such as Blu-ray
or HD DVD (input via HDMI).
5-x.Listening Mode Preset
Analog/PCM
Dolby Digital
DTS
D.F.2ch
D.F.Mono
Last Valid
Last Valid
Last Valid
Last Valid
Last Valid
ENTER
DSD Multi: Specifies the default lis-
tening mode for DSD multichannel
sources, such as SACD.
If the input selector is assigned to an
HDMI IN, use the Down [ ] button to
select the audio formats shown on the
following screen.
When you’ve finished, press the
[SETUP] button.
Setup closes.
5
5-x.Listening Mode Preset
Multich PCM
192k/176.4k
Dolby True HD
DTS-HD Master Audio
DSD
Last Valid
Last Valid
Last Valid
Last Valid
Last Valid
Note:
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV con-
troller by using its [SETUP], [ENTER], and arrow
buttons.
For the TUNER input selector, Analog
is the only format available.
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select an audio for-
]
4
ENTER
[
]/[ ] buttons to select a lis-
tening mode.
Only listening modes compatible with
the audio format can be selected (see
page 80).
Analog/PCM: Specifies the default lis-
tening mode for analog and PCM
sources.
ENTER
Dolby Digital: Specifies the default lis-
tening mode for Dolby Digital sources.
DTS: Specifies the default listening
mode for DTS sources.
D.F. 2ch: Specifies the default listening
mode for 2-channel (2/0) stereo sources
in a digital format, such as Dolby Digi-
tal or DTS.
D.F. Mono: Specifies the default listen-
ing mode for mono sources in a digital
format, such as Dolby Digital or DTS.
Multich PCM: Specifies the default
listening mode for multichannel PCM
sources, such as DVD-Audio (input via
HDMI).
192/176.4k: Specifies the default lis-
tening mode for high resolution
192 kHz and 176.4 kHz digital sources,
such as DVD-Audio.
93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Setup
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select “2. Speaker
Setup,” and then press [ENTER].
]
Speaker Setup
2
3
4
This section explains items on the Speaker Config menu.
ENTER
Some of the speaker settings are set automatically by the
Automatic Speaker Setup function (see page 52).
The Speaker Setup menu appears.
2.Speaker Setup
INPUT SELECTOR
MA
1.Speaker Settings
2.Speaker Config
3.Speaker Distance
4.Level Calibration
5.Equalizer Settings
6.THX Audio Setup
ZONE
2
1
2
REMOTE MODE
ENTER
DVD
VCR
CD
CDR/MD
TV
CABLE
SAT
DOCK
RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
RECEIVER
DIMMER
+
ENTER
SETUP
CH
ENTER
VOL
DISC
ALBUM
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select “2. Speaker
Config,” and then press [ENTER].
]
-
PREV
CH
DISPLAY
MUTING
ENTER
The Speaker Config screen appears.
2-2.Speaker Config
Subwoofer
Front
Center
Surround
Surr Back
Surr Back Ch
LPF of LFE
Double Bass
Yes
Full Band
100Hz
100Hz
100Hz
2ch
Speaker Settings
ENTER
See “Speaker Settings” on page 44.
120Hz
On
Speaker Configuration
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select “Subwoofer,”
and then use the Left and Right
]
These settings are set automatically by the Automatic
Speaker Setup function (see page 52).
ENTER
[
]/[ ] buttons to select:
Yes: Select if a subwoofer is con-
nected.
No: Select if no subwoofer is con-
nected.
With the Speaker Configuration settings, you can specify
which speakers are connected and a crossover frequency
for each speaker.
The following crossover frequencies can be specified:
Full Band, 40 Hz, 45 Hz, 50 Hz, 55 Hz, 60 Hz, 70 Hz,
80 Hz (THX), 90 Hz, 100 Hz, 110 Hz, 120 Hz, 130 Hz,
150 Hz, or 200 Hz.
ENTER
Specify Full Band for speakers that can output low-fre-
quency bass sounds adequately, for example, speakers
with a good sized woofer. For smaller speakers, specify
a crossover frequency. Sounds below the crossover fre-
quency will then be output by the subwoofer instead of
the speaker. Refer to your speakers’ manuals to deter-
mine the optimum crossover frequencies.
If you’re using THX-certified speakers, specify
80 Hz (THX) for all speakers.
Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button, followed by the
[SETUP] button.
1
RECEIVER
The main menu appears onscreen.
94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Setup—Continued
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select “Front,” and
then use the Left and Right
]
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select“Surr Back Ch,”
and then use the Left and Right
]
5
9
ENTER
ENTER
[
]/[ ] buttons to select a
[
]/[ ] buttons to select:
1ch: Select if one surround back
speaker is connected.
crossover frequency.
Note:
• Fixed at Full Band if Subwoofer
(step 4) is set to No.
connected.
ENTER
ENTER
Note:
• Cannot be set if Speaker Type is set
to Bi-Amp (page 44) or SurrBack is
set to None (step 8).
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select “Center,” and
then use the Left and Right
]
6
7
8
Continue with step 10 on the next page.
ENTER
[
]/[ ] buttons to select a
crossover frequency.
If no center speaker is connected, select
None.
Note:
• Cannot select Full Band if Front
(step 5) is set to anything other than
Full Band.
ENTER
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select“Surround,”and
then use the Left and Right
]
ENTER
[
]/[ ] buttons to select a
crossover frequency.
If no surround left and right speakers
are connected, select None.
Note:
• Cannot select Full Band if Front
(step 5) is set to anything other than
Full Band.
ENTER
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select “Surr Back,”
and then use the Left and Right
]
ENTER
[
]/[ ] buttons to select a
crossover frequency.
If no surround back speakers are con-
nected, select None.
Notes:
• Cannot be set if Speaker Type is set
to Bi-Amp (page 44) or Surround is
set to None (step 7).
ENTER
• Cannot select Full Band if Surround
(step 7) is set to anything other than
Full Band.
95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Setup—Continued
Low-Pass Filter for the LFE Channel
Double Bass
This setting is not set automatically by the Automatic
This setting is not set automatically by the Automatic
Speaker Setup function (see page 52).
Speaker Setup function (see page 52).
With this setting, you can specify the cutoff frequency of
the LFE channel’s low-pass filter (LPF), which can be
used to filter out unwanted hum. The LPF only applies to
sources that use the LFE channel.
With this setting, you can boost bass output by feeding
front left and right channel bass sounds to the subwoofer.
This setting can only be made if the Subwoofer setting in
step 4 is set to Yes, and the Front setting in step 5 is set
to Full Band.
* If you’re using THX-certified speakers, select
80 Hz (THX).
* If you’re using THX-certified speakers, select Off
(THX).
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select “LPF of LFE,”
and then use the Left and Right
]
10
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select “Double Bass,”
and then use the Left and Right
]
11
ENTER
[
]/[ ] buttons to select a low-
ENTER
pass filter frequency.
[
]/[ ] buttons to select:
The following low-pass filter frequen-
cies can be selected: 80 Hz (THX),
90 Hz, 100 Hz, 110 Hz, or 120 Hz.
Off(THX):The subwoofer only out-
puts the LFE channel.
On: In addition to LFE channel
sounds, the subwoofer out-
puts front left and right chan-
nel bass sounds.
ENTER
ENTER
Continue with step 11 in the next col-
umn.
Press the [SETUP] button.
Setup closes.
12
Note:
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV con-
troller by using its [SETUP], [ENTER], and arrow
buttons.
96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Setup—Continued
Speaker Distance
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select“Unit,”and then
use the Left and Right [ ]/[
buttons to select:
]
4
5
These settings are set automatically by the Automatic
Speaker Setup function (see page 52).
]
ENTER
feet: Select if you want to enter
distances in feet. Can be set
from 0.2 to 30 feet in 0.2-foot
steps.
With the Speaker Distance settings, you can specify the
distance from each speaker to the listening position.
Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button, followed by the
[SETUP] button.
1
meters: Select if you want to enter
distances in meters. Can be
set from 0.06 to 9 meters in
0.06-meter steps.
ENTER
RECEIVER
The main menu appears onscreen.
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select a speaker, and
use the Left and Right [ ]/[
]
]
ENTER
buttons to specify the distance.
Specify the distance from the speaker
to your listening position.
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select “2. Speaker
Setup,” and then press [ENTER].
]
2
3
Notes:
ENTER
• The Center distance cannot be set if
Center is set to None in the Speaker
Configuration (page 94).
The Speaker Setup menu appears.
ENTER
2.Speaker Setup
1.Speaker Settings
2.Speaker Config
3.Speaker Distance
4.Level Calibration
5.Equalizer Settings
6.THX Audio Setup
• The Surr Right and Surr Left dis-
to None in the Speaker Configuration
(page 94).
ENTER
• The Surr Back R and Surr Back L
distances cannot be set if Speaker
Type is set to Bi-Amp (page 44) or
Surr Back is set to None in the
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
]
buttons to select“3. Speaker Dis-
tance,” and then press [ENTER].
The Speaker Distance screen appears.
Speaker Configuration (page 94).
ENTER
• The Subwoofer distance cannot be
set if Subwoofer is set to No (step 4).
2-3.Speaker Distance
Unit
Left
Center
Right
Surr Right
Surr Back R
Surr Back L
Surr Left
Subwoofer
feet
12.0ft
12.0ft
12.0ft
12.0ft
12.0ft
12.0ft
12.0ft
12.0ft
Repeat step 5 for each speaker.
6
7
ENTER
Press the [SETUP] button.
Setup closes.
Note:
• Speakers that you set to No or None
in the Speaker Configuration
(page 94) cannot be selected.
Note:
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV con-
troller by using its [SETUP], [ENTER], and arrow
buttons.
97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Setup—Continued
Speaker Level Calibration
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
]
3
buttons to select “4. Level Cali-
bration,” and then press
[ENTER].
These settings are set automatically by the Automatic
Speaker Setup function (see page 52).
ENTER
The Level Calibration screen appears
and the pink noise test tone is output by
the front left speaker.
With the Level Calibration settings, you can adjust the
level of each speaker while listening to the test tone so
that the volume of each speaker is the same at the listen-
ing position.
ENTER
2-4.Level Calibration
Left
Center
Right
Surr Right
Surr Back R
Surr Back L
Surr Left
Subwoofer
-12.0dB
-12.0dB
-12.0dB
-12.0dB
-12.0dB
-12.0dB
-12.0dB
-15.0dB
Note:
• The test tone is output at the standard level for THX,
which is 0 dB (absolute volume setting 82). If you nor-
mally listen at volume settings below this, be careful
because the test tone will be much louder.
Note:
Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
• Levels cannot be adjusted for speak-
ers set to No or None in the Speaker
Configuration (page 94).
1
MODE button, followed by the
[SETUP] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
RECEIVER
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select a speaker, and
]
4
5
use the Left and Right [ ]/[
Levels can be adjusted from –12 to
+12 dB in 0.5 dB steps (–15 to +12 dB
for the subwoofer).
]
ENTER
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select “2. Speaker
]
2
Setup,” and then press [ENTER].
Repeat step 4 for each speaker
so that the volume of the test
tone from each speaker is the
same.
ENTER
The Speaker Setup menu appears.
2.Speaker Setup
1.Speaker Settings
2.Speaker Config
3.Speaker Distance
4.Level Calibration
5.Equalizer Settings
6.THX Audio Setup
If you’re using a handheld sound level
meter, adjust the level of each speaker
so that it reads 75 dB SPL at the listen-
ing position, measured with C-weight-
ing and slow reading.
ENTER
Press the [SETUP] button.
Setup closes.
6
Note:
• Speaker levels can also be adjusted by using the dedi-
cated buttons on the remote controller. Press the
[TEST TONE] button to output the test tone. Use the
[CH SEL] button to select each speaker, and use the
[LEVEL–] and [LEVEL+] buttons to adjust the level.
98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Setup—Continued
Equalizer Settings
Use the Left and Right [ ]/[
buttons to set the “Equalizer”
option to:
Off: Equalizer off, flat response.
Manual:The equalizer for each
speaker can be set manually.
Audyssey:The equalizer for each
speaker is set automatically
by the Automatic Speaker
]
4
These settings are set automatically by the Automatic
Speaker Setup function (see page 52).
ENTER
With the Equalizer settings, you can adjust the tone of
speakers individually with a 15-band equalizer. The vol-
ume of each speaker can be set on page 98.
Setup function.
Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button, followed by the
[SETUP] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
1
If you selected Manual, continue with
the next step. If you selected Off or
Audyssey, go to step 8.
RECEIVER
Use the Down [ ] button to
select “Channel,” and then use
the Left and Right [ ]/[ ] but-
tons to select the speaker.
You can select: Front, Center, Sur-
round, Surr Back, or Subwoofer.
5
6
ENTER
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select “2. Speaker
Setup,” and then press [ENTER].
]
2
3
ENTER
The Speaker Setup menu appears.
ENTER
2.Speaker Setup
1.Speaker Settings
2.Speaker Config
3.Speaker Distance
4.Level Calibration
5.Equalizer Settings
6.THX Audio Setup
ENTER
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
]
buttons to select a frequency,
and use the Left and Right
ENTER
[
]/[ ] buttons to cut or boost
that frequency.
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
]
You can select: 25 Hz, 40 Hz, 63 Hz,
100 Hz, 160 Hz, 250 Hz, 400 Hz,
630 Hz, 1000 Hz, 1600 Hz, 2500 Hz,
4000 Hz, 6300 Hz, 10000 Hz, or
16000 Hz. And for the subwoofer,
25 Hz, 40 Hz, 63 Hz, 100 Hz, or
160 Hz.
buttons to select “5. Equalizer
Settings,” and then press
[ENTER].
ENTER
The Equalizer Settings screen appears.
ENTER
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ] but-
tons move between the two screens.
ENTER
2-5.Equalizer Settings
Each band can be cut or boosted from
–6 dB to +6 dB in 1 dB steps.
Equalizer
Channel
25Hz
Manual
Front
0dB
Tip: Low frequencies, such as 160 Hz,
affect bass sounds; high frequencies,
such as 6300 Hz, affect treble sounds.
40Hz
63Hz
100Hz
160Hz
250Hz
400Hz
0dB
0dB
0dB
0dB
0dB
0dB
2-5.Equalizer Settings
630Hz
1000Hz
1600Hz
2500Hz
4000Hz
6300Hz
10000Hz
16000Hz
0dB
0dB
0dB
0dB
0dB
0dB
0dB
0dB
99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Setup—Continued
Use the Up [ ] button to select
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select “2. Speaker
Setup,” and then press [ENTER].
]
7
2
“Channel” again, and use the
Left and Right [ ]/[ ] buttons to
select another speaker.
ENTER
ENTER
The Speaker Setup menu appears.
Repeat steps 6 and 7 for each speaker.
2.Speaker Setup
1.Speaker Settings
2.Speaker Config
3.Speaker Distance
4.Level Calibration
5.Equalizer Settings
6.THX Audio Setup
ENTER
ENTER
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
]
3
4
buttons to select “6.THX Audio
Setup,” and then press [ENTER].
The THX Audio Setup screen appears.
Press the [SETUP] button.
Setup closes.
8
ENTER
2-6.THX Audio Setup
Surr Back Sp Spacing
THX Subwoofer
BGC
1ft-4ft
Yes
Off
ENTER
Notes:
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV con-
troller by using its [SETUP], [ENTER], and arrow
buttons.
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
]
• The Equalizer settings have no effect on 176.4/
192 kHz input signals.
buttons to select “Surr Back Sp
Spacing,” and use the Left and
Right [ ]/[ ] buttons to specify
the distance between your sur-
round back speakers:
ENTER
THX Audio Setup
< 1 ft (< 0.3 m) (Default): Select this if
your surround back speakers are
between 0 and 1 foot (0–30 cm) apart.
These settings are not set automatically by the Auto-
matic Speaker Setup function (see page 52).
ENTER
1–4 ft (0.3–1.2 m): Select this if your
surround back speakers are between 1
and 4 feet (0.3–1.2 m) apart.
With the Surr Back Sp Spacing setting, you can specify
the distance between your surround back speakers.
If you’re using a THX-certified subwoofer, set the THX
Subwoofer setting to Yes. You can then apply THX’s
Boundary Gain Compensation (BGC) to compensate the
perceived exaggeration of low frequencies for listeners
sitting very close to a room boundary (i.e., wall).
>4 ft (>1.2 m): Select this if your sur-
round back speakers are more than 4
feet (1.2 m) apart.
Note:
• This setting is only available if the
Surr Back Ch setting in the Speaker
Configuration is set to 2ch (page 95).
Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button, followed by the
1
RECEIVER
[SETUP] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Setup—Continued
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select “THX Sub-
woofer,” and use the Left and
Right [ ]/[ ] buttons to select:
No: Select this if you do not have
a THX-certified subwoofer.
]
Press the [SETUP] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
5
2
3
ENTER
Yes: Select this if you have a THX-
certified subwoofer.
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select “4. Source
]
Setup,” and then press [ENTER].
The Source Setup menu appears. The
name of the currently selected input
selector is displayed in a box.
ENTER
ENTER
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
]
4.Source Setup
DVD
1.IntelliVolume
2.A/V Sync
3.Name Edit
4.Satellite Radio
5.SIRIUS Parental Lock
6
ENTER
buttons to select “BGC,” and use
the Left and Right [ ]/[ ] but-
tons to select:
ENTER
Off: Select this to turn off BGC.
On: Select this to turn on BGC.
Note:
• This setting is only available if THX
Subwoofer is set to Yes (step 5).
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select an item, and
then press [ENTER].
]
4
5
ENTER
ENTER
The screen for that item appears.
Press the [SETUP] button.
The setup menu closes.
7
ENTER
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select an option, and
use the Left and Right [ ]/[
buttons to change it.
The Source Setup menu items are
explained below.
]
Note:
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV con-
troller by using its [SETUP], [ENTER], and arrow
buttons.
]
ENTER
Source Setup
ENTER
This section explains items on the Source Setup menu.
Items can be set individually for each input selector.
Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button, and then use the
1
RECEIVER
input selector buttons to select
an input source.
DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
3
1
GAME/TV
4
2
AUX1
5
AUX
6
2
TAPE
7
TUNER
8
CD
9
PHONO
+10
101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Setup—Continued
Name Edit
When you’ve finished, press the
[SETUP] button.
Setup closes.
6
You can enter a custom name for each individual input
selector and radio preset for easy identification. When
selected, the custom name will appear on the display.
Select the input selector to which
1
you want to give a custom name.
To name a radio preset, use the
[TUNER] button to select AM or FM,
and then select the preset.
IntelliVolume
With IntelliVolume, you can set the input level for each
input selector individually. This is useful if one of your
source components is louder or quieter than the others.
Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button, followed by the
[SETUP] button.
2
RECEIVER
Use the Left and Right [ ]/[ ] buttons to set the level.
If a component is noticeably louder than the others, use
the Left [ ] button to reduce its input level. If it’s
noticeably quieter, use the Right [ ] button to increase
its input level. The input level can be adjusted from
–12 dB to +12 dB in 1 dB steps.
Note:
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select “4. Source
Setup,” and then press [ENTER].
]
• IntelliVolume does not apply for Zone 2 or Zone 3.
3
4
A/V Sync
ENTER
The Source Setup menu appears.
When using your DVD player’s progressive scanning
function, you may find that the picture and sound are out
of sync. With the A/V Sync setting, you can correct this
by applying a delay to the audio signal. The delay can be
set from 0 to 250 milliseconds (msec) in 5 millisecond
steps.
4.Source Setup
DVD
1.IntelliVolume
2.A/V Sync
3.Name Edit
4.Satellite Radio
5.SIRIUS Parental Lock
ENTER
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ] buttons to select an
input selector, and use the Left and Right [ ]/[ ] but-
tons to set the delay.
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
]
To view the TV picture while setting the delay, press
[ENTER].
buttons to select “Name Edit,”
and then press [ENTER].
The Name Edit screen appears.
ENTER
4-2.A/V Sync
DVD
4-3.Name Edit
DVD
A/V Sync
(HDMI LipSync
100msec
60msec)
Display
Name
Default
Press Enter to see picture
[
]
ENTER
If HDMI Lip Sync is enabled (see page 107), and your
TV or display supports HDMI Lip Sync, the displayed
delay time will be the A/V Sync delay time. The HDMI
Lip Sync delay time is displayed underneath in parenthe-
ses.
If you’re naming an item for the very
first time, go to step 6.
If the item already has a name, you can
select Default or Custom in step 5.
Note:
• A/V Sync cannot be set when the PureAudio listening
mode is selected, or when the Direct listening mode is
used with an analog input source.
102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Setup—Continued
When you’ve finished, use the
arrow [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] buttons
to display the following screen,
select “OK,” and then press
[ENTER].
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select “Display,” and
use the Left and Right [ ]/[
buttons to select:
Default: The default name is dis-
played.
]
8
5
ENTER
ENTER
]
4-3.Name Edit
Custom:The custom name is dis-
played.
Name
[
]
ENTER
A B C D E F G H I J K L M
ENTER
Q
d
N O P
R S T U V W X Y Z
g
a
c
e
j
o m
b
f
h i
k
When Default is selected, the station’s
frequency appears on the display when
a radio preset is selected.
n o p q
r s t
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 - . ‘
u v w x y z
_
( ) +
= / , : ; ! ?
OK
*
Cancel
Press the Down [ ] button to
select “Name,” and then press
[ENTER] to open the character
input screen.
6
7
“OK”
Press the [SETUP] button.
ENTER
9
Setup closes.
4-3.Name Edit
Name
[
]
A B C D E F G H I J K L M
ENTER
Q
d
N O P
R S T U V W X Y Z
g
a
c
e
j
o m
b
f
h i
k
n o p q
u v w x y z
r s t
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 - . ‘
_
( ) +
= / , : ; ! ?
OK
Notes:
• To store a name, you must select “OK” and press
[ENTER] in step 7, otherwise it will not be saved.
*
Cancel
• You cannot enter a custom name for XM or SIRIUS
radio presets.
Use the arrow [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[
]
buttons to select a character, and
then press [ENTER].
Repeat this step to enter up to 10
characters.
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV con-
buttons.
ENTER
To correct a character:
1. Use the arrow [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[
Satellite Radio
]
ENTER
buttons to select the incorrect char-
acter, and then press [ENTER]. The
character input screen opens.
This item is for use with satellite radio. It’s not available
if Satellite Radio is set to None (see page 107). See
2. Use the arrow [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[
]
SIRIUS Parental Lock
buttons to select the correct charac-
ter, and then press [ENTER].
This item is for use with SIRIUS Satellite Radio. It’s not
available if Satellite Radio is set to None or XM (see
page 107). See page 70 for more information.
103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Setup—Continued
Miscellaneous Setup
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
]
4
buttons to select an item, and
use the Left and Right [ ]/[
buttons to change it.
This section explains items on the Miscellaneous menu.
]
ENTER
+10
0
MA
The items are explained below.
ZONE
2
1
2
REMOTE MODE
DVD
VCR
CD
CDR/MD
TV
CABLE
SAT
DOCK
RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
RECEIVER
DIMMER
ENTER
+
ENTER
SETUP
CH
ENTER
VOL
DISC
ALBUM
-
PREV
CH
DISPLAY
MUTING
When you’ve finished, press the
[SETUP] button.
5
Setup closes.
Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button, followed by the
[SETUP] button.
1
Note:
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV con-
troller by using its [SETUP], [ENTER], and arrow
buttons.
RECEIVER
The main menu appears onscreen.
Volume Setup
■ Volume Display
With this setting, you can choose how the volume level
is displayed.
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select
“6. Miscellaneous,” and then
press [ENTER].
]
2
3
Absolute: Display range is Min, 0.5 through 99.5,
Max.
Relative: Display range is –∞ dB, –81.5 dB,
–81.0 dB through +18.0 dB.
The absolute value 82 is equivalent to the relative value
0 dB.
ENTER
The Miscellaneous menu appears.
6.Miscellaneous
1.Volume Setup
2.OSD Setup
3.12V Trigger
4.12V Trigger
5.12V Trigger
ENTER
A
B
C
Setup
Setup
Setup
■ Muting Level
This setting determines how much the output is muted
when the Muting function is used (see page 76). It can be
set to –∞ dB (fully muted) or from –50 dB to –10 dB in
10 dB steps.
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select an item, and
then press [ENTER].
]
■ Maximum Volume
With this setting, you can limit the maximum volume.
ENTER
The screen for that item appears.
When the Volume Display setting is set to Absolute, the
Maximum Volume range is Off, 99 to 50. When it’s set
to Relative, the range is Off, +17 dB to –32 dB. To dis-
able this setting, select Off.
ENTER
104
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Setup—Continued
■ Power On Volume
This setting determines what the volume will be each
OSD Setup
time the AV controller is turned on.
■ Immediate Display
This setting determines whether operation details are
displayed onscreen immediately after an AV controller
function is used.
When the Volume Display preference is set to Absolute,
the range is Last, Min, 1 to Max. When it’s set to Rela-
tive, the range is Last, –∞ dB, –81 dB to +18 dB.
On: Displayed (default).
Off: Not displayed.
To use the same volume level as when the AV controller
was last turned off, select Last.
Even if On is selected, operation details are not output if
the input source is connected to a COMPONENT
VIDEO IN or HDMI IN.
Note:
• The Power On Volume setting cannot be set higher
than the Maximum Volume setting.
For optimal video performance, THX recommends that
Immediate Display be turned off.
■ Headphone Level
With this setting, you can offset the headphone volume
relative to the main volume. This is useful if your head-
phones are too loud or too quiet at the volume setting you
usually use when listening through your speakers. The
headphone level can be set from –12 dB to +12 dB.
■ Monitor Type
With this setting, you can specify the aspect ratio of your
TV so that menus are displayed properly.
4:3: Select if your TV is 4:3 (default).
16:9: Select if your TV is 16:9.
■ Zone2 Maximum Volume
With this setting, you can limit the maximum volume for
Zone 2.
■ Display Position
This setting determines where on the screen operation
When the Volume Display setting is set to Absolute, the
Maximum Volume range is Off, 99 to 50. When it’s set
to Relative, the range is Off, +17 dB to –32 dB. To dis-
able this setting, select Off.
details are displayed.
Bottom: Bottom of the screen (default).
Top: Top of the screen.
■ Language
■ Zone2 Power On Volume
onscreen setup menus.You can select: English, German,
French, Spanish, Italian, Dutch, Swedish, or Japanese.
This setting determines what the volume will be for
Zone 2 each time the AV controller is turned on.
When the Volume Display preference is set to Absolute,
the range is Last, Min, 1 to Max. When it’s set to Rela-
tive, the range is Last, –∞ dB, –81 dB to +18 dB.
12V Trigger A/B/C Setup
See “Using the 12V Triggers” on page 114.
To use the same volume level as when the AV controller
was last turned off, select Last.
■ Zone3 Maximum Volume
With this setting, you can limit the maximum volume for
Zone 3.
When the Volume Display setting is set to Absolute, the
Maximum Volume range is Off, 99 to 50. When it’s set
to Relative, the range is Off, +17 dB to –32 dB. To dis-
able this setting, select Off.
■ Zone3 Power On Volume
This setting determines what the volume will be for
Zone 3 each time the AV controller is turned on.
When the Volume Display preference is set to Absolute,
the range is Last, Min, 1 to Max. When it’s set to Rela-
tive, the range is Last, –∞ dB, –81 dB to +18 dB.
To use the same volume level as when the AV controller
was last turned off, select Last.
105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Setup—Continued
Hardware Setup
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
]
4
5
buttons to select an item, and
use the Left and Right [ ]/[
buttons to change it.
This section explains items on the Hardware menu.
]
ENTER
The items are explained below.
Remote
indicator
ON
STANDBY
TV
INPUT
INPUT
DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
3
When you’ve finished, press the
[SETUP] button.
Number
buttons
+
TV CH
-
1
GAME/TV
4
2
AUX1
5
AUX
6
2
TAPE
7
TUNER
8
CD
9
Setup closes.
TV VOL
PHONO
D. TUN
+10
-- --- 10
/
CLEAR
0
11
12
INPUT SELECTOR
MACRO
ZONE
ZONE
3
2
1
2
3
REMOTE MODE
DVD
VCR
CD
Note:
CDR/MD
TV
CABLE
SAT
DOCK
RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV con-
troller by using its [SETUP], [ENTER], and arrow
buttons.
RECEIVER
DIMMER
+
ENTER
SETUP
CH
ENTER
VOL
DISC
ALBUM
Remote Control
-
PREV
CH
■ Remote ID
DISPLAY
MUTING
When several Onkyo components are used in the same
room, their remote ID codes may overlap. To differenti-
ate the AV controller from the other components, you
can change its remote ID from 1, the default, to 2 or 3.
YLIST
RANDOM
Note:
Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button, followed by the
[SETUP] button.
• If you do change the AV controller’s remote ID, be
sure to change the remote controller to the same ID
(see below), otherwise, you won’t be able to control it
with the remote controller.
1
RECEIVER
The main menu appears onscreen.
Changing the Remote Controller’s ID
While holding down the
[RECEIVER] REMOTE MODE but-
ton, press the TV [INPUT] button.
1
RECEIVER
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
]
The Remote indicator flashes four
times.
2
3
buttons to select “7. Hardware
Setup,” and then press [ENTER].
The Hardware Setup menu appears.
ENTER
7.Hardware Setup
1.Remote Control
2.Zone2/Zone3
3.Tuner
4.Analog Multich
5.HDMI
Use the number buttons to enter
ID 1, 2, or 3.
The Remote indicator flashes twice.
2
ENTER
DVD
1
VCR/DVR
2
CBL/SAT
3
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select an item, and
then press [ENTER].
]
ENTER
The screen for that item appears.
Zone 2 and Zone 3
See “Zone 2 and Zone 3” on page 109.
106
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Setup—Continued
■ Lip Sync
Tuner
The Lip Sync function can automatically synchronize
HDMI audio and video that’s gotten out of sync due to
the complex digital video processing being performed by
your HDMI-compatible TV. With HDMI Lip Sync, the
audio delay required to synchronize the audio and video
is calculated and applied automatically by the AV con-
troller.
■ Satellite Radio
If you connect an XM Satellite Radio antenna or SIRIUS
Satellite Radio antenna to the AV controller (both sold
separately), set this setting to XM or SIRIUS respec-
tively. If you connect both types of antenna, select
XM/SIRIUS. Otherwise, select None. See the separate
Satellite Radio Guide for more information.
Disable: HDMI lip sync disabled.
Enable: HDMI lip sync enabled.
Analog Multich
Notes:
• This function works only if your HDMI-compatible
TV supports HDMI Lip Sync.
■ Subwoofer Input Sensitivity
Some DVD players output the LFE channel from their
analog subwoofer output at 15 dB higher than normal.
With this setting, you can change the AV controller’s
subwoofer sensitivity to match your DVD player. Note
that this setting only affects signals connected to the AV
controller’s MULTI CH SUBWOOFER jack.
• You can check the amount of delay being applied by
the HDMI Lip Sync function on the A/V Sync screen
(see page 102).
■ xvYCC
If your HDMI source and HDMI-compatible TV both
support the xvYCC color standard, you can enable
xvYCC color on the AV controller with this setting.
You can select 0 dB, 5 dB, 10 dB, or 15 dB.
If you find that your subwoofer is too loud, try the 10 dB
or 15 dB setting.
Disable: xvYCC color disabled.
Enable: xvYCC color enabled.
HDMI
■ Control
This function allows CEC-compatible components or
RIHD-compatible components connected via HDMI to
be controlled with the AV controller.
■ HDMI Audio Out
This setting determines whether audio received by an
HDMI input is output by the HDMI outputs. You may
want to change this setting to On if your TV is connected
to an HDMI output and you want to listen to audio from
an HDMI component through your TV’s speakers. Nor-
mally, it should be set to Off.
Disable: HDMI Control disabled.
Enable: HDMI Control enabled.
Notes:
• HDMI control works only with the HDMI OUT
MAIN jack, not the HDMI OUT SUB jack.
Off: HDMI audio is not output (default).
On: HDMI audio is output.
• Select Disable if a connected component is incompat-
ible or you’re not sure about its compatibility.
Notes:
• If On is selected and the signal can be output by the
TV, the AV controller will output no sound through its
speakers.
• If operation is unreliable when set to Enable, select
Disable instead.
• When the HDMIAudio Out setting is set to On, or TV
Control is set to Enable and you’re listening through
your TV’s speakers (see page 37), if you turn up the
AV controller’s volume control, the sound will be out-
put by the AV controller’s speakers. To stop the AV
controller’s speakers producing sound, change the set-
tings, change your TV’s settings, or turn down the AV
controller’s volume.
• When TV Control is enabled, this setting is set to
Auto.
• With some TVs and input signals, no sound may be
output even if On is selected.
• When the HDMIAudio Out setting is set to On, or TV
Control is set to Enable and you’re listening through
your TV’s speakers (see page 37), if you turn up the
AV controller’s volume control, the sound will be out-
put by the AV controller’s speakers. To stop the AV
controller’s speakers producing sound, change the set-
tings, change your TV’s settings, or turn down the AV
controller’s volume.
Power Control
To link the power functions of CEC-compatible compo-
nents or RIHD-compatible components connected via
HDMI, select Enable.
Disable: Power Control disabled.
Enable: Power Control enabled.
Notes:
• The Power Control setting can be set only when the
above Control setting is set to Enable.
107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Setup—Continued
• HDMI power control only works with HDMI-compat-
ible components that support it and may not work
properly with some components due to their settings
or compatibility.
• When set to Enable, the AV controller consumes more
power.
• When set to Enable, the AV controller enters Ready
mode when set to Standby. Also, the AV controller’s
AC outlets will be on all of the time regardless of
whether the AV controller is set to On or Standby, or
Ready mode in this case.
TV Control
Select Enable to control the AV controller from an
RIHD-compatible TV connected via HDMI.
Disable: TV Control disabled.
Enable: TV Control enabled.
Notes:
• Select Disable if your TV is incompatible or you’re
note sure about its compatibility.
• The TV Control setting can be set only when the above
Control and Power Control settings are both set to
Enable.
Note:
• After changing the Control, Power Control, or TV
Control setting, be sure to turn all of your compo-
nents off and then back on again. Refer to the
instruction manuals for your other components.
Network
These settings are for use with home automation equip-
ment and external controllers.
Lock Setup
Lock
With this setting, you can protect your settings by lock-
ing the setup menus.
Locked: Setup menus locked.
Unlocked: Setup menus unlocked.
When Locked is selected, only this Lock Setup item can
be accessed.
108
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Zone 2 and Zone 3
In addition to your main listening room, you can also enjoy playback in two other rooms, or as we call them, Zone 2
and Zone 3. And, you can select a different source for each room.
Zone 2 Video Outputs
Connecting Zone 2
The AV controller features a composite video output and
component video output for connection to a TV in
Zone 2 speakers must be connected to an amp in Zone 2.
Zone 2, so you can enjoy both audio and video in that
zone.
ConnectingYour Zone 2 Speakers
You can enjoy 2-channel stereo playback in Zone 2 and
a different source to those selected for your main room
• Use a composite video cable to connect the AV con-
and Zone 3.
Hookup
troller’s ZONE 2 OUT V jack to a composite video
Hookup
input on your Zone 2 TV.
• Use an RCA audio cable to connect the AV control-
ler’s ZONE 2 PRE OUT L/R jacks to an analog audio
input on your Zone 2 amp.
• Alternatively, use a component video cable to connect
the AV controller’s COMPONENT VIDEO MONI-
TOR OUT 2/ZONE 2 OUT jacks to a component
video input on your Zone 2 TV.
• Use an RCA audio cable to connect the AV control-
ler’s ZONE 2 PRE OUT SW jack to the line input on
a powered subwoofer in Zone 2.
Main room
TV
• Connect your Zone 2 speakers to the speaker termi-
nals on your Zone 2 amp.
Main room
AV controller
Multichannel power amp
MONITOR OUT
/ZONE OUT
2
ZONE 2
OUT
2
AV controller
ZONE 2 ZONE 3
SW
Zone 2
L
R
TV
PRE OUT
Zone 2
• If you use the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR
OUT 2/ZONE 2 OUT, you must set the Monitor Out2
setting to Zone 2 (see page 45).
LINE INPUT
IN
Notes:
Powered
subwoofer
R
L
• The ZONE 2 OUT V jack outputs video from compo-
nents connected to composite video inputs and
S-Video inputs.
Receiver/
integrated amp
• The COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR
OUT 2/ZONE 2 OUT outputs video from components
connected to component video inputs.
Note:
• With the default settings, the Zone 2 volume must be
set on the Zone 2 amp. If your Zone 2 amp has no vol-
ume control, set the Zone 2 Out setting to Variable so
that you can set the Zone 2 volume on the AV control-
ler (see page 110).
109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Zone 2 and Zone 3—Continued
Connecting Zone 3
Zone 2/Zone 3 Out Settings
Zone 3 speakers must be connected to an amp in Zone 3.
If you’ve connected your Zone 2 or Zone 3 speakers to
an amp with no volume control, set the Zone 2 Out or
Zone 3 Out setting, respectively, to Variable so that you
can set the zone’s volume, balance, and tone on the AV
controller.
ConnectingYour Zone 3 Speakers
You can enjoy 2-channel stereo playback in Zone 3 and
a different source to those selected for your main room
and Zone 2.
Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button, followed by the
[SETUP] button.
1
Hookup
RECEIVER
• Use an RCA audio cable to connect the AV control-
ler’s ZONE 3 PRE OUT L/R jacks to an analog audio
input on your Zone 3 amp.
The main menu appears onscreen.
• Use an RCA audio cable to connect the AV control-
ler’s ZONE 3 PRE OUT SW jack to the line input on
a powered subwoofer in Zone 3.
• Connect your Zone 3 speakers to the speaker termi-
nals on your Zone 3 amp.
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
]
2
3
4
Main room
buttons to select “7. Hardware
Setup,” and then press [ENTER].
The Hardware Setup menu appears.
ENTER
Multichannel power amp
ENTER
AV controller
ZONE 3
SW
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select “2. Zone 2/
Zone 3,”and then press [ENTER].
]
L
ENTER
The Zone 2/Zone 3 screen appears.
R
PRE OUT
7-2.Zone2/Zone3
Zone2 Out
Zone3 Out
Fixed
Fixed
Zone 3
ENTER
LINE INPUT
IN
Powered
subwoofer
R
L
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
]
Receiver/
integrated amp
buttons to select“Zone 2 Out”or
“Zone 3 Out,” and use the Left
and Right [ ]/[ ] buttons to
select:
Fixed: The Zone 2 or Zone 3 volume
must be set on the amp in that
zone.
Variable: The Zone 2 or Zone 3 vol-
ume can be set on the AV con-
troller.
ENTER
Note:
• With the default settings, the Zone 3 volume must be
set on the Zone 3 amp. If your Zone 3 amp has no vol-
ume control, set the Zone 3 Out setting to Variable so
that you can set the Zone 3 volume on the AV control-
ler (see page 110).
ENTER
110
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Zone 2 and Zone 3—Continued
Selecting an Input Source for Zones
Press the [SETUP] button.
Setup closes.
5
On the remote controller, press
the [ZONE 2] or [ZONE 3]
REMOTE MODE button.
1
Remote
controller
ZONE
3
2
On the AV controller, press the
[ZONE 2] or [ZONE 3] button.
Note:
ZONE
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV con-
troller by using its [SETUP], [ENTER], and arrow
buttons.
AV controller
The ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 indicator
flashes, and the input selector currently
selected for the zone appears on the dis-
play.
ZONE 2
Using Zone 2 and Zone 3
This section explains how to use Zone 2 and Zone 3.
ZONE3
ZONE 3
On the remote controller, use the
INPUT SELECTOR buttons.
ZONE2
TONE
2
Remote
controller
MASTER VOLUME
DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
STANDBY/ON
1
GAME/TV
4
2
AUX1
5
3
AUX
6
STANDBY
On the AV controller, use the
input selector buttons, or press
the [ZONE 2] or [ZONE 3] button
repeatedly
2
ZONE
ZONE
2
3
TAPE
7
TUNER
8
CD
9
PURE AUDIO
AUDIO SEL
DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
GAME/TV
AUX
1
AUX
2
TAPE
TUNER
CD
PHONO
DISPLAY
PUSH TO OPEN
TUNING
PRESET
RETURN
ZONE
ZONE
2
3
OFF
LEVEL
TONE
HDMI OUT
STEREO
THX
SETUP MIC
AUX
2
L
INPUT
TUNING
PHONES
POWER
RT/PTY/TP MEMORY MODE
SETUP
PHONO
+10
CLEAR
ON
OFF
DIGITAL INPUT
LISTENING MODE
S
VIDEO
VIDEO
AUDIO
R
DIGITAL
ENTER
TUNING
The input source is selected, the zone is
turned on, the name of the input selec-
tor appears on the display, and the
ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 indicator lights
continuously.
OFF
AV controller
,
ZONE 2
STANDBY
ON
ON
STANDBY
TV
INPUT
DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
3
ZONE 3
+
TV CH
-
1
GAME/TV
4
2
AUX1
5
AUX
6
2
INPUT
SELECTOR
TAPE
7
TUNER
8
CD
9
Notes:
TV VOL
PHONO
D. TUN
+10
-- --- 10
/
CLEAR
12
0
• To select AM, FM, SIRIUS, or XM, press the
[TUNER] input selector button repeatedly.
11
INPUT SELECTOR
MACRO
ZONE
ZONE
3
2
1
2
3
ZONE3
ZONE2
REMOTE MODE
• Only analog input sources are output by Zone 2 and
Zone 3. Digital input sources are not output. If no
sound is heard when an input source is selected, check
to make sure it’s connected to an analog input.
DVD
VCR
CD
CDR/MD
TV
CABLE
SAT
DOCK
RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
DIMMER
• While Zone 2 or Zone 3 is on, the Auto Power On/
+
CH
ENTER
VOL
DISC
ALBUM
Standby and Direct Change
work.
functions do not
-
PREV
CH
• You cannot select different AM or FM radio stations
for your main room, Zone 2, and Zone 3. The same
AM/FM radio station will be heard in each room.
However, you can select different AM/FM, SIRIUS,
or XM stations. For example, XM for your main room,
SIRIUS for Zone 2, and AM/FM for Zone 3.
MUTING
DISPLAY
MUTING
REC
PLAYLIST
RANDOM
LISTENING MODE
SURR
STEREO
REPEAT
AUDIO
DIRECT
SUBTITLE PLAY MODE
PURE
A
THX
ALL ST
-
+
LEVEL
TEST TONE
CH SEL
LEVEL
OPEN/CLOSE VIDEO OFF
LEVEL–,
LEVEL+
AUDIO SEL
VCR
L
NIGHT
Re-EQ
HDD
DVD
RC-690
M
111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Zone 2 and Zone 3—Continued
Turning Off Zones
Adjusting the Balance of Zones
On the remote controller, press
the [ZONE 2] or [ZONE 3]
REMOTE MODE button.
On the AV controller, press the
[ZONE 2] or [ZONE 3] button.
1
1
Remote
controller
AV controller
ZONE 2
ZONE
3
2
On the AV controller, press the
[ZONE 2] or [ZONE 3] button.
ZONE
AV controller
ZONE 3
TONE
The ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 indicator
flashes.
ZONE 2
Press the AV controller’s [TONE]
button repeatedly to select Bal-
ance.
2
3
ZONE 3
Use the Up [ ] and Down [
]
On the remote controller, press
the [STANDBY] button.
2
buttons to adjust the balance.
You can adjust the balance from 0 in the
center to +10 dB to the right or +10 dB
to the left in 2 dB steps.
Remote
controller
STANDBY
On the AV controller, press the
[OFF] button.
The zone is turned off, and the ZONE 2
or ZONE 3 indicator goes off.
AV controller
OFF
Adjusting the Volume of Zones
Remote
controller
On the remote controller, press
the [ZONE 2] or [ZONE 3]
REMOTE MODE button, and then
use the [LEVEL–] and [LEVEL+]
buttons.
ZONE
3
ZONE
LEVEL
2
LEVEL
On the AV controller, press the
[ZONE 2] or [ZONE 3] button,
press the [LEVEL] button, and
then use the Up [ ] and Down
AV controller
[
] buttons.
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
112
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Zone 2 and Zone 3—Continued
Muting Zones
On the remote controller, press
the [ZONE 2] or [ZONE 3]
REMOTE MODE button, and then
press the [MUTING] button.
ZONE
3
2
ZONE
To unmute a zone, on the remote
controller, press the [ZONE 2] or
[ZONE 3] REMOTE MODE button,
and then press the [MUTING] but-
ton again.
MUTING
Adjusting the Tone of Zone 2
On the AV controller, press the
[ZONE 2] button.
1
AV controller
ZONE 2
Press the AV controller’s [TONE]
button repeatedly to select Bass
or Treble.
2
3
TONE
Use the Up [ ] and Down [
]
buttons to adjust the bass or tre-
ble.
You can boost or cut the Bass or Treble
from –10 dB to +10 dB in 1 dB steps.
Notes:
• Zones can also be unmuted by adjusting the volume.
• The tone cannot be adjusted for Zone 3.
effect on the ZONE 2 PRE OUT when the Zone 2 Out
setting is set to Fixed (page 110).
• The Zone 3 level and balance functions have no effect
on the ZONE 3 PRE OUT when the Zone 3 Out set-
ting is set to Fixed (page 110).
113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Zone 2 and Zone 3—Continued
Using the 12V Triggers
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
]
3
buttons to select “12V Trigger A,
B, or C,” and then press [ENTER].
The 12V Trigger A/B/C Setup screen
appears.
The 12V triggersA, B, and C can be used to turn on 12V
trigger-capable components automatically when they are
selected as the input source. The triggers can be set so
that they activate when a connected component is
selected as the input source for the main room, Zone 2,
Zone 3, or any combination of rooms.
ENTER
6-x.12V Trigger x Setup
Delay
DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
TV/GAME
AUX1
AUX2
TAPE
TUNER
CD
PHONO
1sec
Main/Zone2
Main/Zone2
Main/Zone2
Main/Zone2
Main/Zone2
Main/Zone2
Main/Zone2
Main/Zone2
Main/Zone2
Main/Zone2
ENTER
When triggered, the output from a 12V TRIGGER OUT
goes high (+12 volts, 100 milliamperes max).
C
12V TRIGGER OUT
A
B
HDMI
ASSIGNABLE
AC INLET
OUT
OUT
SUB
RS232
IN
4
IN
3
IN
2
IN
1
MAIN
HD RADIO
XM
ANTENNA
MONITOR OUT
/ZONE OUT
2
COMPONENT VIDEO ASSIGNABLE
SIRIUS
AM
FM75
2
MONITOR
OUT
IN
3
IN
2
IN 1(DVD)
1
AM
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
]
Y
MONITOR
OUT
AUX
1
GAME/TV CBL/SA
T
VCR/DVR
DVD
IR
ANTENNA
V
V
A
IN
B
C
AC OUTLET
4
5
REMOTE
C
C
B/PB
ZONE
OUT
2
FM
75
CONTROL
12V TRIGGER OUT
DIGITAL ASSIGNABLE
COAXIAL
ZONE
2
ZONE
3
IN
1
(DVD)
R/PR
SW
L
S
S
FRONT CENTER
OUT
A
B
buttons to select“Delay,”and use
the Left and Right [ ]/[ ] but-
tons to select: 0 sec, 1 sec, 2 sec,
or 3 sec.
When 0 sec is selected, the trigger sig-
nal is output as soon as the input source
is changed.
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
SURR SURR BACK FRONT CENTER SURR
SURR BACK
IN
IN
IN
IN
2
3
1
2
VCR/DVR)
L
L
AC 120V 60Hz
SWITCHED
120W 1A MAX.
(CBL/SAT)
R
R
R
OPTICAL
SUBWOOFER
SUBWOOFER PRE OUT
PRE OUT
PHONO
CD
TAPE
AUX
1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT
VCR/DVR
FRONT
DVD
MULTI CH
(GAME/TV)
(CD)
GND
BALANCE
MONO
L
SURR BACK
Bi-AMP
R
SURR BACK
Bi-AMP
L
BALANCE
R
SURR
R
R
CENTER
FRONT
L
SURR
L
SUBWOOFER
ENTER
2
1
1
2
3
3
OUT
HOT GND
COLD
GND HOT
COLD
INPUT
PRE OUT
Hookup
• Use a miniplug cable to connect the AV controller’s
12V TRIGGER OUT A, B, or C jack to the 12 V trig-
ger input on a connected component.
ENTER
When several components are turned on simultaneously
by using triggers A, B, and C, depending on the type of
components, a large amount of current may be drawn
momentarily. To prevent this, you can delay trigger sig-
nals A, B, and C individually. Another application for
trigger delay is eliminating the “thump” noise that’s
sometimes heard when a source component is turned on.
Delaying the trigger signal for your power amplifier so
that it’s the last component to be turned on will accom-
plish this.
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select an input source,
and use the Left and Right
]
ENTER
[
]/[ ] buttons to select an
option.
Off: No trigger signal is output.
A 12-volt trigger signal is output when
the connected component is selected as
the source for:
Main: Main room.
Zone2: Zone 2.
Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button, followed by the
[SETUP] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
1
ENTER
RECEIVER
Main/Z2:Main room or Zone 2.
Zone3: Zone 3.
Main/Z3:Main room or Zone 3.
Z2/Z3: Zone 2 or Zone 3.
Main/Z2/Z3:Main room, Zone 2, or
Zone 3.
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select
“6. Miscellaneous,” and then
press [ENTER].
]
2
When you’ve finished, press the
[SETUP] button.
Setup closes.
6
ENTER
The Miscellaneous menu appears.
6.Miscellaneous
1.Volume Setup
2.OSD Setup
3.12V Trigger
4.12V Trigger
5.12V Trigger
ENTER
A
B
C
Setup
Setup
Setup
114
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Zone 2 and Zone 3—Continued
Using a Multiroom Kit with a Cabinet
Using the Remote Controller in
In this setup, the IR receiver picks up the infrared signals
from the remote controller and feeds them to the AV con-
troller located in the cabinet via the connecting block.
Zone 2/3 and Multiroom Control Kits
To control the AV controller with the remote controller
while you’re in Zone 2 or Zone 3, you’ll need a commer-
cially available multiroom remote control kit for each
zone.
• Multiroom kits are made by Niles and Xantech.
IR Receiver
Connecting
block
These kits can also be used when there isn’t a clear line
of sight to the AV controller’s remote sensor, such as
when it’s installed inside a cabinet.
IR IN
A or B
Using a Multiroom Kit with Zone 2/3
In this setup, the IR receiver in Zone 2/3 picks up the
infrared signals from the remote controller and feeds
them through to the AV controller in the main room via
the connecting block.
Inside
cabinet
Remote controller
Signal flow
Using a Multiroom Kit with Other
Components
IR IN
A or B
In this setup, an IR emitter is connected to the AV con-
troller’s IR OUT jack and placed in front of the other
component’s remote control sensor. Infrared signals
received at the AV controller’s IR IN A or B jack are fed
through to the other component via the IR emitter. Sig-
nals picked up by the AV controller’s remote control sen-
sor are not output.
IR Receiver
Connecting
block
Remote controller
IR Receiver
Connecting
Main room
Zone 2/3
block
Signal flow
IR IN
A or B
AV controller
The miniplug cable from the connecting block should be
connected to the AV controller’s IR IN A or B jack, as
shown below. The IR IN A and B jacks are identical. Up
to two IR receivers can be connected.
IR OUT
IR Emitter
Remote controller
Other component
From the connecting block
Miniplug cable
Signal flow
IR
A
B
The IR emitter should be connected to the AV control-
ler’s IR OUT jack, as shown below.
IN
OUT
AV controller
Miniplug cable
Other component
Remote control
sensor
Emitter
IR
A
B
IN
Miniplug
IR Emitter
OUT
AV controller
Signal flow
115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling Other Components
You can control your other components, including those
This section explains how to:
• Enter the remote control code for a component that
you want to control: DVD, TV, VCR, etc.
While holding down the REMOTE
MODE button to which you want
to enter the code, press the
[STANDBY] button.
2
REMOTE MODE
DVD
VCR
CD
TV
CDR/MD
The Remote indicator lights up.
CABLE
SAT
DOCK
• Learn commands directly from another component’s
remote controller (see page 119).
• Program the MACRO buttons to perform a sequence
of up to eight remote control actions (see page 120).
STANDBY
Entering Remote Control Codes
To control another component, you must first enter that
component’s remote control code to a REMOTE MODE
button. You’ll need to enter a code for each component
that you want to control.
Within 30 seconds, use the num-
ber buttons to enter the 4-digit
remote control code.
3
DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
3
1
GAME/TV
4
2
AUX1
5
AUX2
The Remote indicator flashes twice.
6
Remote
TAPE
7
TUNER
8
CD
9
indicator
STANDBY
ON
STANDBY
TV
INPUT
0
TV
I
DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
3
+
TV CH
-
1
GAME/TV
4
2
AUX1
5
AUX
6
2
Number
buttons
TAPE
7
TUNER
8
CD
9
TV VOL
PHONO
D. TUN
Press the REMOTE MODE button
again to select the remote con-
troller mode, point the remote
controller at the component, and
check the operation.
+10
-- --- 10
/
INPUT SELECTOR
MACRO
CLEAR
12
0
4
11
ZONE
ZONE
3
2
1
2
3
REMOTE MODE
DVD
VCR
CD
REMOTE
MODE
CDR/MD
TV
CABLE
SAT
DOCK
RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
RECEIVER
DIMMER
If the remote controller doesn’t work as
expected, and several remote codes are
listed, try each one in turn and use the
one that works best.
+
CH
ENTER
VOL
DISC
ALBUM
-
PREV
CH
DISPLAY
MUTING
Notes:
• Remote control codes cannot be entered for the
[RECEIVER] REMOTE MODE button.
REC
PLAYLIST
RANDOM
• The remote control codes provided are correct at the
time of printing but subject to change.
LISTENING MODE
SURR
STEREO
REPEAT
AUDIO
DIRECT
SUBTITLE PLAY MODE
PURE
A
THX
ALL ST
• The DOCK remote mode can only be used with
the Onkyo RI Dock at this time.
-
+
LEVEL
TEST TONE
CH SEL
LEVEL
OPEN/CLOSE VIDEO OFF
AUDIO SEL
VCR
L
NIGHT
Re-EQ
HDD
DVD
• The [DVD] and [CD] REMOTE MODE buttons
are preprogrammed for use with Onkyo DVD
players and CD players, respectively.
RC-690
M
• To control another manufacturer’s CD recorder or
MD recorder, enter the appropriate remote control
code to the [CD] REMOTE MODE button.
Look up the component’s remote
control code in the separate
Remote Control Codes list.
1
The codes are organized by category.
116
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling Other Components—Continued
Remote Control Codes for Onkyo
Components Connected via
Resetting the Remote Mode Buttons
You can reset a REMOTE MODE button to its default
remote control code.
Onkyo components that are connected via
are con-
trolled by pointing the remote controller at the AV con-
troller, not the component. This allows you to control
components that are out of view, in a rack, for example.
While holding down the REMOTE
MODE button that you want to
1
REMOTE MODE
reset, press the TV [
] button.
DVD
VCR
The Remote indicator flashes three
times.
Make sure the Onkyo component is con-
CD
TV
1
CDR/MD
nected with an
cable and an analog
CABLE
SAT
DOCK
audio cable (RCA).
See page 42 for details.
Enter the appropriate remote control code
to the REMOTE MODE button.
2
• [DVD] REMOTE MODE button
5002: Onkyo DVD player with
Press the REMOTE MODE button
again.
2
• [CD] REMOTE MODE button
REMOTE MODE
6002: Onkyo CD player with
The Remote indicator flashes twice,
indicating that the button has been
reset.
DVD
VCR
CD
• [MD] REMOTE MODE button
TV
CDR/MD
6008: Onkyo MD recorder with
CABLE
SAT
DOCK
The [DVD] and [CD] REMOTE
MODE buttons are preprogrammed
with remote control codes for control-
ling Onkyo DVD players and CD play-
ers, respectively. When these buttons
are reset, the preprogrammed codes are
restored.
• [CDR] REMOTE MODE button
6006: Onkyo CD recorder with
• [DOCK] REMOTE MODE button
6004: Onkyo DS-A1 RI Dock with
See the previous page for how to enter remote
control codes.
Press the REMOTE MODE button, point
the remote controller at the AV controller,
and operate the component.
3
Resetting the Remote Controller
You can reset the remote controller to its default settings.
If you want to control an Onkyo component by pointing
the remote controller directly at it, or you want to control
While holding down the
[RECEIVER] REMOTE MODE but-
ton, press the [STANDBY] button.
The Remote indicator flashes five
times.
1
an Onkyo component that’s not connected via
the following remote control codes:
, use
RECEIVER
• [DVD] REMOTE MODE button
5001: Onkyo DVD player without
(default)
(default)
STANDBY
• [CD] REMOTE MODE button
6001: Onkyo CD player without
• [MD] REMOTE MODE button
6007: Onkyo MD recorder without
Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button again.
The Remote indicator flashes twice,
2
• [CDR] REMOTE MODE button
RECEIVER
6005: Onkyo CD recorder without
indicating that the remote controller
has been reset.
• [DOCK] REMOTE MODE button
6003: Onkyo DS-A2 RI Dock without
Note:
• If you connect an
-capable Onkyo MiniDisc or CD
recorder to the TAPE IN/OUT jacks, for remote oper-
ation to work properly, you must set the Input Display
to MD or CDR, respectively (see page 49).
117
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling Other Components—Continued
To control another component, point the remote controller at it and use the buttons explained below. (You must select
the appropriate remote controller mode with the REMOTE MODE buttons first.)With some components, certain buttons
may not work as expected, and some may not work at all.
■ Controlling a TV
■ Controlling a VCR
■ Controlling a Satellite or
Cable Receiver
Press [VCR] first
Press [CABLE] (SAT) first
Press [TV] first
ON
STANDBY
ON
STANDBY
ON
STANDBY
TV
A
2
TV
TV
INPUT
INPUT
A
2
INPUT
5
3
A
2
DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
3
DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
3
DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
3
1
GAME/TV
4
2
AUX1
5
+
TV CH
-
1
GAME/TV
4
2
AUX1
5
+
TV CH
-
1
GAME/TV
4
2
AUX1
5
+
TV CH
-
AUX
6
2
AUX
6
2
AUX
6
2
TAPE
7
TUNER
8
CD
9
TAPE
7
TUNER
8
CD
9
TAPE
7
TUNER
8
CD
9
TV VOL
PHONO
D. TUN
TV VOL
TV VOL
PHONO
D. TUN
PHONO
+10
/
D. TUN
6
+10
-- --- 10
/
CLEAR
0
+10
CLEAR
CLEAR
0
0
11
12
11
12
11
12
--
/
--- 10
-- --- 10
INPUT SELECTOR
MACRO
INPUT SELECTOR
INPUT SELECTOR
MACRO
MACRO
3
3
ZONE
3
2
1
2
3
ZONE
3
2
ZONE
3
2
1
2
3
1
2
3
REMOTE MODE
REMOTE MODE
REMOTE MODE
DVD
VCR
CD
ZONE
DVD
VCR
CD
ZONE
DVD
VCR
CD
ZONE
CDR/MD
CDR/MD
CDR/MD
TV
CABLE
SAT
DOCK
RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
TV
CABLE
SAT
DOCK
RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
TV
CABLE
SAT
DOCK
RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
DIMMER
DIMMER
DIMMER
8
8
3
8
9
8
4
9
4
+
+
+
CH
CH
CH
ENTER
VOL
DISC
ALBUM
ENTER
VOL
ENTER
VOL
DISC
ALBUM
DISC
ALBUM
-
-
-
8
7
PREV
CH
8
6
9
9
PREV
CH
PREV
CH
4
8
DISPLAY
MUTING
5
8
5
6
DISPLAY
MUTING
DISPLAY
MUTING
REC
PLAYLIST
RANDOM
8
REC
PLAYLIST
RANDOM
REC
PLAYLIST
RANDOM
7
LISTENING MODE
SURR
LISTENING MODE
SURR
LISTENING MODE
SURR
STEREO
STEREO
STEREO
REPEAT
AUDIO
DIRECT
SUBTITLE PLAY MODE
REPEAT
AUDIO
DIRECT
SUBTITLE PLAY MODE
REPEAT
AUDIO
DIRECT
SUBTITLE PLAY MODE
PURE
A
THX
ALL ST
PURE
A
THX
ALL ST
PURE
A
THX
ALL ST
TEST TONE
CH SEL
LEVEL
-
LEVEL
+
TEST TONE
CH SEL
LEVEL
-
LEVEL
+
TEST TONE
CH SEL
LEVEL
-
LEVEL
+
OPEN/CLOSE VIDEO OFF
OPEN/CLOSE VIDEO OFF
OPEN/CLOSE VIDEO OFF
AUDIO SEL
VCR
L
NIGHT
Re-EQ
HDD
AUDIO SEL
VCR
L
NIGHT
Re-EQ
HDD
AUDIO SEL
VCR
L
NIGHT
Re-EQ
HDD
7
DVD
DVD
DVD
RC-690
M
RC-690
M
RC-690M
A [ON], [STANDBY]
A [ON], [STANDBY]
A [ON], [STANDBY],TV [
]*
Set the satellite/cable receiver to
Set the VCR to On or Standby.
Set the TV to On or Standby.
On or Standby.
B Number buttons
B Number buttons
B Number buttons
Enter numbers.
Enter numbers.
Enter numbers.
C [CLEAR]
C [CH +/–],TV CH [+]/[–]*
C [CLEAR]
Cancels functions.
Select channels on the TV.
Cancels functions.
D [CH +/–]
D [PREV CH]
D [CH +/–]
Selects channels on the VCR.
Selects the previous channel.
Selects satellite/cable channels.
E [PREV CH]
E [TV INPUT]*
E [PREV CH]
Selects the previous channel.
Selects the TV’s external inputs.
Selects the previous channel.
F REC [
]
F TV VOL [ ]/[ ]*
F [GUIDE]
Starts recording.
Adjust the TV’s volume.
Displays the program guide.
G Eject [
]
G [MUTING]
G [ ], [
]
Ejects the videocassette.
Mutes the TV.
Rewind and Fast forward.
H [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [
]
H [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[MENU]/
[ENTER]/[RETURN]
H [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[MENU]/
[ENTER]/[RETURN]
Play, Pause, Stop, Rewind, and
Fast forward.
Navigate menus on the TV.
Navigate menus on the satel-
lite/cable receiver.
I [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[MENU]/
[ENTER]/[RETURN]
*Buttons marked with an asterisk (*)
are exclusively for controlling a TV
and can be used at any time, regard-
less of the currently selected remote
controller mode.
Navigate menus on the VCR.
118
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling Other Components—Continued
Learning Commands
If the command is learned successfully,
the Remote indicator flashes twice.
The AV controller’s remote controller can learn the com-
mands of other remote controllers. By transmitting, for
remote controller, the remote controller can learn it, and
then transmit the exact same command when its Play [
button is pressed in the CD remote mode.
V O L U M E
M U T
T O N E
T E S T
C H S E L
C
D
P E T
T U N E R
D V D
T
I N U T
M U L T I - C H
P H O N O
G R O U P
M O D E
S U R
D I S C
T U N E R
C
D
V I D E O - 2
I N P U T L E C T O R
T A E
About 2 to 6
D I M M E R
]
V I D E O - 1
S L E E P
D
inches (5–15 cm)
P O W E R
O
N
This is useful when you’ve entered the appropriate remote
control code (page 116) but some buttons don’t work as
expected.
D
S
V
T
A
D
G
1
N
D
A
M
B
E
D
Y
/T
4
C
R
V
T
/D
A
P
V
R
2
E
7
AU
X1
PH
ONO
I
C
+
5
B
T
V
T
10
L
-
U
/
-
S
A
N
/
-
-
E
3
T
R
A
U
-
INPUT
8
IN
P
U
1
0
SELECTOR
0
X
1
2
T
6
C
D
+
D
MACRO
T
VD
9
V
1
D.TUN
1
C
H
CLEAR
2
RE
MO
TE
VCR
T
1
2
V
V
CABLE
SAT
M
3
O
L
OD
CDR/MD
CD
E
Z
O
DO
N
E
3
CK
Z
O
N
E
2
R
TA
EC
EIVER
PE
/A
MP
SLEEP
RC-690M
Remote
indicator
ON
STANDBY
To learn more commands, repeat
steps 2 and 3.
Press any REMOTE MODE button
when you’ve finished.
TV
4
INPUT
1
DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
3
+
TV CH
-
1
GAME/TV
4
2
AUX1
5
AUX
6
2
TAPE
7
TUNER
8
CD
9
TV VOL
PHONO
D. TUN
Notes:
+10
-- --- 10
/
INPUT SELECTOR
MACRO
CLEAR
12
0
11
• The following buttons cannot learn new commands:
REMOTE MODE, MACRO [1], [2], [3], TV CH [+]/[–
], Re-EQ, LIGHT.
ZONE
ZONE
3
2
1
2
3
REMOTE MODE
DVD
VCR
CD
• When you want to learn the command from your TV’s
Power button, select the TV remote control mode and
use the remote controller’s [STANDBY] button to learn
the command. In the TV remote control mode, the
CDR/MD
1, 4
TV
CABLE
SAT
DOCK
RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
DIMMER
remote controller’s [STANDBY] and TV [
tons are linked, so using the [STANDBY] button to
learn the command will mean that you can also use the
] but-
+
CH
ENTER
VOL
DISC
ALBUM
-
TV [
] button to turn your TV on or off in TV
remote control mode.
• When you want to learn the commands from your TV’s
Channel Up and Down buttons, select the TV remote
control mode and use the remote controller’s CH [+/–]
button (left to the [ENTER] button) to learn the com-
mands. In the TV remote control mode, the remote con-
troller’s CH [+/–] and TV CH [+]/[–] buttons are linked,
so using the CH [+/–] button to learn these commands
will mean that you can also use the TV CH [+]/[–] but-
tons to change channels in TV remote control mode.
• The remote controller can learn approximately 70 to 90
commands, although this will be less if commands that
use a lot of memory are learned.
While holding down the REMOTE
MODE button for the mode in
which you want to use the com-
mand, press the [ON] button.
The Remote indicator lights up.
1
REMOTE MODE
DVD
VCR
CD
TV
CDR/MD
CABLE
SAT
DOCK
RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP
• Remote controller buttons such as Play, Stop, Pause,
and so on are preprogrammed with commands for con-
trolling Onkyo CD players, cassette decks, and DVD
players. However, they can learn new commands, and
you can restore the preprogrammed commands at any
time by resetting the remote controller (see page 117).
• To overwrite a previously learned command, repeat this
procedure.
• Only commands from infrared remote controllers can
be learned.
• When the remote controller’s batteries expire, all
learned commands will be lost and will have to be
learned all over again, so don’t discard your other
remote controllers.
ON
Press the button you want to
learn the new command.
2
3
Point the remote controllers at
each other, about 2 to 6 inches
(5–15 cm) apart, and then press
and hold the button whose com-
mand you want to learn until the
Remote indicator flashes.
119
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling Other Components—Continued
Using Macros
Press the buttons whose actions
you want to program into the
macro in the order you want them
performed.
For the CD example in the left column,
you’d press the following buttons:
[ON], [CD] INPUT SELECTOR, [CD]
REMOTE MODE, Play [ ].
2
You can program the remote controller’s MACRO but-
tons to perform a sequence of remote control actions.
Example:
To play a CD you typically need to perform the follow-
ing actions:
1. Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE MODE button
to select the RECEIVER remote controller mode.
2. Press the [ON] button to turn on the AV controller.
3. Press the [CD] INPUT SELECTOR button to
select the CD input source.
4. Press the [CD] REMOTE MODE button to select
the CD remote controller mode.
5. Press the Play [ ] button to start playback on the
When you’ve finished, press the
MACRO button again.
The Remote indicator flashes twice.
If you enter eight commands, the pro-
cess will finish automatically.
3
CD player.
Note:
• If any of the buttons you used to make a macro are
taught new commands, the macro will no longer work
properly and will have to be made again.
You can program a MACRO button so that all five
actions are performed with just one button press.
Making Macros
Running Macros
Each MACRO button can store one macro, and each
macro can contain up to eight commands.
Press the MACRO [1], [2], or [3]
button.
Remote
The commands in the macro are trans-
mitted in the order in which they were
programmed. Keep the remote control-
ler pointed at the AV controller until all
of the commands have been transmit-
ted.
indicator
ON
STANDBY
TV
INPUT
DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
3
+
TV CH
-
1
GAME/TV
4
2
AUX1
5
AUX
6
2
TAPE
7
TUNER
8
CD
9
TV VOL
PHONO
D. TUN
Macros can be run at any time, regard-
less of the current remote controller
mode.
+10
-- --- 10
/
INPUT SELECTOR
MACRO
CLEAR
12
0
11
MACRO
1, 2, 3
ZONE
3
2
1
2
3
REMOTE MODE
DVD
VCR
CD
ZONE
CDR/MD
REMOTE
MODE
TV
CABLE
SAT
DOCK
RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
RECEIVER
DIMMER
Deleting Macros
While holding down the
[RECEIVER] REMOTE MODE but-
ton, press the MACRO button
1
While holding down the REMOTE
MODE button of the remote con-
troller mode you want to use at
the start of the macro, press
MACRO button [1], [2], or [3].
The Remote indicator lights up.
RECEIVER
1
REMOTE MODE
whose macro you want to delete.
DVD
VCR
CD
TV
CDR/MD
CABLE
SAT
DOCK
RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP
For the CD example in the left column,
you’d press and hold the [RECEIVER]
REMOTE MODE button, and then
press MACRO button [1], [2], or [3].
Press the MACRO button again.
2
120
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
If you have any trouble using the AV controller, look for
a solution in this section. If you can’t resolve the issue
yourself, contact the dealer from whom you purchased
this unit.
• If your turntable uses an MC cartridge, you must use
an MC head amp or MC transformer (page 39).
• Check the speaker settings (pages 94–99).
• If the digital signal format is set to PCM or DTS, set it
to Auto (page 78).
• If there’s no sound from a DVD player connected to an
HDMI IN, check the DVD player’s output settings,
and be sure to select a compatible audio format.
If you can’t resolve the issue yourself, try resetting
the AV controller before contacting the dealer from
whom you purchased this unit.
To reset the AV controller to its factory defaults,
turn it on and, while holding down the [VCR/DVR]
button, press the [STANDBY/ON] button. “Clear”
will appear on the display and the AV controller
will enter Standby mode.
front speakers and subwoofer produce sound.
• In the Mono listening mode, only the front speakers
output sound if the Output Speaker setting is set to L/R
(page 91).
STANDBY/ON
• Check the Speaker Configuration (page 94).
VCR/DVR
Only the center speaker produces sound
• If you use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie or Dolby
Pro Logic IIx Music listening mode with a mono
speaker.
• In the Mono listening mode, only the front speakers
output sound if the Output Speaker setting is set to C
(page 91).
Note that resetting the AV controller will delete your
radio presets and custom settings.
Power
Can’t turn on the AV controller
• Make sure that the power cord is plugged into the wall
outlet properly.
• Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet, wait 5
seconds or more, then plug it back in again.
• Check the Speaker Configuration (page 94).
The surround speakers produce no sound
the surround speakers produce no sound.
• Depending on the source and the current listening
mode, not much sound may be produced by the sur-
round speakers. Try another listening mode (page 79).
• Check the Speaker Configuration (page 94).
Audio
• Make sure that your multichannel power amplifier is
controller properly (page 19).
selector (page 49).
• Make sure that the correct audio input is selected
(page 78).
• Make sure that all audio connecting plugs are pushed
in all the way (page 26).
• Make sure that the polarity of the speaker cables is
correct, and that the bare wire is in contact with the
metal part of each speaker terminal.
• Make sure that the speaker cables are not shorting.
designed for home theater enjoyment and has a wide
volume range for precise adjustment.
The center speaker produces no sound
speaker produces no sound.
• In the Mono listening mode, only the front speakers
output sound if the Output Speaker setting is set to L/R
(page 91).
• Check the Speaker Configuration (page 94).
The surround back speakers produce no sound
• The surround back speakers are not used with all lis-
tening modes. Try another listening mode (page 79).
• Not much sound may be produced by the surround
back speakers with some sources.
• Check the Speaker Configuration (page 94).
press the remote controller’s [MUTING] button to
unmute the AV controller (page 76).
• While a pair of headphones is connected to the
PHONES jack, no sound is output by the main room
speakers (page 77).
• Check the digital audio output settings on the source
component. On some game consoles, such as those
that can play DVDs, the default setting is off.
• With some DVD-Video discs, you need to select an
audio format from a menu or with the AUDIO button
on your DVD player’s remote controller.
The subwoofer produces no sound
• If the source material contains no audio in the LFE
channel, the subwoofer produces no sound.
• Check the Speaker Configuration (page 94).
The Zone 2/3 speakers produce no sound
• The Zone 2/3 speakers only output sources that are
connected to an analog input. Check to see if the
source component is connected to an analog input.
121
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting—Continued
There’s no sound with a certain signal format
• Check the digital audio output setting on the source
component. On some game consoles, such as those
that can play DVDs, the default setting is off.
• With some DVD-Video discs, you need to select an
audio format from a menu or with the AUDIO button
on your DVD player’s remote controller.
Video
There’s no picture
• Make sure that all video connecting plugs are pushed
in all the way (page 26).
• Make sure that each video component is properly con-
nected.
• On your TV, make sure that the video input to which
the AV controller is connected is selected.
video circuitry is turned off and only the HDMI out-
puts output video signals.
• If your TV is connected to an HDMI output, set the
HDMI Monitor setting to Main or Sub (page 45), and
select “- - -” in the “HDMI Input Setup” on page 47 to
• If your TV is connected to the COMPONENTVIDEO
MONITOR OUT 1 or COMPONENT VIDEO MON-
ITOR OUT 2/ZONE 2 OUT, set the HDMI Monitor
setting to No (page 45), and select “- - -” in the “Com-
ponent Video Input Setup” on page 48 to watch com-
posite video and S-Video sources.
• If the video source is connected to a component video
input, your TV must be connected to the COMPO-
NENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT 1, COMPONENT
VIDEO MONITOR OUT 2/ZONE 2 OUT, HDMI
OUT MAIN, or HDMI OUT SUB (page 27).
• If the video source is connected to an HDMI input,
your TV must be connected to the HDMI OUT MAIN
Can’t select the Pure Audio listening mode
• The Pure Audio listening mode cannot be selected
while Zone 2 is on.
• Check to see if a maximum volume has been set
(page 104).
• After the Automatic Speaker Setup function has been
run, or the volume level of each individual speaker has
been adjusted (pages 76 and 98), the maximum vol-
ume may be reduced.
Noise can be heard
• Using cable ties to bundle audio cables with power
cords, speaker cables, and so on can degrade audio
performance, so don’t use them.
• An audio cable may be picking up interference. Try
repositioning your cables.
• Make sure that the source is Dolby Digital (page 89).
• Check the multichannel input connections (page 31).
• Make sure that the multichannel input is assigned to
the input selector (page 51).
• Make sure that the multichannel input is selected
(page 78).
• Check the audio output settings on your DVD player.
There’s no picture from a source connected to
an HDMI IN
• When the HDMI Monitor setting is set to No, and the
Resolution setting is set to anything other than
Through (see page 45), no video is output by the
HDMI OUT.
• If the message “Resolution Error” appears on the AV
controller’s display, this indicates that your TV does
not support the current video resolution and you need
to select another resolution on your DVD player.
About DTS signals
• When playing DTS program material, using the pause,
fast forward, or fast reverse function on your player
may produce a short audible noise. This is not a mal-
function.
• When DTS program material ends and the DTS bit-
stream stops, the AV controller remains in DTS listen-
ing mode and the DTS indicator remains on. This is to
prevent noise when you use the pause, fast forward, or
fast reverse function on your player. If you switch your
player from DTS to PCM, as the AV controller does
not switch formats immediately, you may not hear
anything, in which case you should stop your player
for about 3 seconds, and then resume playback.
• With some CD players, you won’t be able to playback
DTS material properly even though your player is con-
nected to a digital input on the AV controller. This is
usually because the DTS bitstream has been processed
(e.g., output level, sampling rate, or frequency response
changed) and the AV controller doesn’t recognize it as a
genuine DTS signal. In such cases, you may hear noise.
The onscreen menus don’t appear
• On your TV, make sure that the video input to which
the AV controller is connected is selected.
Tuner
Reception is noisy, stereo FM reception suffers
from hiss, or the FM STEREO indicator doesn’t
light up
• Relocate your antenna.
• Move the AV controller away from your TV or com-
puter.
• Listen to the station in mono (page 58).
• When listening to anAM station, operating the remote
controller may cause noise.
• Passing cars and airplanes can cause interference.
• Concrete walls weaken radio signals.
• If nothing improves the reception, install an outdoor
antenna.
The beginning of audio received by an HDMI IN
can’t be heard
• Since it takes longer to identify the format of an
HDMI signal than it does for other digital audio sig-
nals, sound may not be output immediately.
122
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting—Continued
Remote Controller
Others
The remote controller doesn’t work
rect polarity (page 13).
away from the AV controller and there’s no obstruc-
ler’s remote control sensor (page 13).
• Make sure you’ve selected the correct remote control-
ler mode (page 14).
• Make sure you’ve entered the correct remote control
code (page 116).
The sound changes when I connect my head-
phones
• When a pair of headphones is connected, the listening
mode is set to Stereo, unless it’s already set to Stereo,
Mono, or Direct, in which case it stays the same.
How do I change the language of a multiplex
source
• On the Audio Adjust menu, change the Multiplex set-
The
functions don’t work
• To use
, you must make an
connection and an
Can’t control other components
• Make sure you’ve selected the correct remote control-
ler mode (page 14).
analog audio connection (RCA) between the compo-
nent and AV controller, even if they are connected dig-
itally (page 42).
• While Zone 2 or Zone 3 is selected, the
don’t work.
• If you’ve connected an
-capable Onkyo MD
functions
recorder, CD recorder, or RI Dock to the TAPE
IN/OUT jacks, or an RI Dock to the GAME/TV IN
jacks, for the remote controller to work properly, you
must set the Input Display to MD, CDR, or DOCK,
respectively (see page 49).
The AV controller’s display doesn’t work
• The display is turned off when the Pure Audio listen-
Components connected to the AV controller’s
AC outlets don’t turn on or off when the AV con-
troller is set to On or Standby
• When the HDMI Control setting is set to Enable
(page 107), the AC outlets are on all the time regard-
less of whether the AV controller is set to On or
Standby, or Ready mode in this case, so any compo-
nents connected to them cannot be turned on or off
automatically.
• The entered remote control code may not be correct. If
more than one code is listed, try each one.
• If none of the codes work, use the Learning function
to learn the commands of the other component’s
remote controller (page 119).
work as expected, and some may not work at all.
• To control an Onkyo component that’s connected via
, point the remote controller at the AV controller.
first (page 117).
• To control an Onkyo component that’s not connected
via
, or another manufacturer’s component, point
the remote controller at that component. Be sure to enter
the appropriate remote control code first (page 116).
The AV controller contains a microcomputer for signal
processing and control functions. In very rare situations,
severe interference, noise from an external source, or
static electricity may cause it to lockup. In the unlikely
event that this happens, unplug the power cord from the
wall outlet, wait at least 5 seconds, and then plug it back
in again.
Can’t learn commands from another remote
controller
• When learning commands, make sure that the trans-
mitting ends of both remote controllers are pointing at
each other.
• Are you trying to learn from a remote controller that
cannot be used for learning? Some commands cannot
be learned, especially those that contain several
instructions.
Onkyo is not responsible for damages (such as CD
rental fees) due to unsuccessful recordings caused by
this unit’s malfunction. Before you record important
data, make sure that the material will be recorded cor-
rectly.
Recording
Set the AV controller to Standby before disconnecting
the power cord from the wall outlet.
Can’t record
• On your recorder, make sure the correct input is
selected.
• To prevent signal loops and damage to the AV control-
ler, input signals are not fed through to outputs with
the same name (e.g., TAPE IN to TAPE OUT or
VCR/DVR IN to VCR/DVR OUT).
• When the PureAudio listening mode is selected, video
recording is not possible because no video signals are
output. Select another listening mode.
123
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
Amplifier Section
General
THD (Total Harmonic
Distortion)
Power Supply
Power Consumption:
AC 120 V, 60 Hz
1.1 A
0.05% (1 Vrms)
Input Sensitivity and
Impedance
Dimensions
(W × H × D)
200 mV/ 47 kΩ (LINE)
2.5 mV/47 kΩ (PHONO MM)
435 × 194 × 448.5 mm
17-1/8"
13.5 kg
×
7-5/8"× 17-11/16"
Output Level and
Impedance
Phono Overload
Frequency Response
Tone Control
Weight
200 mV/ 470 Ω (REC OUT)
70 mV (MM 1 kHz, 0.5%)
5 Hz–100 kHz/ +1 dB–3 dB (Direct mode)
10 dB, 20 Hz (BASS)
10 dB, 20 kHz (TREBLE)
110 dB (LINE, IHF-A)
80 dB (PHONO, IHF-A)
29.8 lbs.
■ Video Input
HDMI
Component
Composite
IN 1, IN 2, IN 3, IN 4
IN 1 (DVD), IN 2, IN 3
AUX 1, GAME/TV, CBL/SAT,
VCR/DVR, DVD, AUX 2
Signal to Noise Ratio
S-Video
AUX 1, GAME/TV, CBL/SAT,
VCR/DVR, DVD, AUX 2
Video Section
Input Sensitivity/Output
Level and Impedance
■ Video Output
HDMI
Component
Composite
1 Vp-p /75Ω (Component and S-VideoY)
0.7 Vp-p /75Ω (Component Pb/Cb,Pr/Cr)
0.28 Vp-p /75Ω (S-Video C)
OUT (MAIN), OUT (SUB)
MONITOR OUT 1, MONITOR OUT 2
VCR/DVR OUT, MONITOR OUT
VCR/DVR OUT, MONITOR OUT
1 Vp-p /75Ω (Composite)
S-Video
Component Video
Frequency Response
5 Hz – 100 MHz, –3 dB
■ Audio Inputs
Digital Inputs
COAXIAL IN 1, IN 2, IN 3,
OPTICAL IN 1, IN 2, IN 3 (Front)
Tuner Section
Analog Inputs
PHONO, CD, TAPE, AUX 1, GAME/TV,
CBL/SAT, VCR/DVR, DVD, MULTI CH
(FRONT, CENTER, SUBWOOFER,
SURR, SURR BACK), AUX 2
■ FM
Tuning Frequency Range
87.5 MHz– 107.9 MHz
530 kHz–1710 kHz
Balance Inputs
Multichannel Inputs
BALANCE L, BALANCE R
7.1 ch
■ AM
Tuning Frequency Range
■ Audio Outputs
Digital Output
OPTICAL (OUT)
Analog Outputs
TAPE, VCR/DVR, PRE OUT (FRONT,
CENTER, SUBWOOFER, SURR, SURR
BACK, ZONE 2, ZONE 3)
■ Digital Tuner
XM, SIRIUS, HD RADIO
40
Balance Pre Outputs
FL, FR, C, SL, SR, SBL, SBR, SW
Multichannel Pre
Outputs
7
Preset Channel
Subwoofer Pre Outputs
Speaker Outputs
1
HDMI MAIN (FL, FR, C, SL, SR, SBL,
SBR, + ZONE 2 (L, R)
Phones
PHONES
■ Control Terminal
MIC
Yes
RS232
1
Ethernet
1
IR Input/Output
12 V Trigger Out
2/1
3
Specifications and features are subject to change without
notice.
124
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Memo
125
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Memo
126
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Memo
127
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sales & Product Planning Div. : 2-1, Nisshin-cho, Neyagawa-shi, OSAKA 572-8540, JAPAN
Tel: 072-831-8023 Fax: 072-831-8124
ONKYO U.S.A. CORPORATION
18 Park Way, Upper Saddle River, N.J. 07458, U.S.A.
Tel: 201-785-2600 Fax: 201-785-2650 http://www.us.onkyo.com/
ONKYO EUROPE ELECTRONICS GmbH
Liegnitzerstrasse 6, 82194 Groebenzell, GERMANY
Tel: +49-8142-4401-0 Fax: +49-8142-4401-555 http://www.eu.onkyo.com/
ONKYO EUROPE UK Office
Suite 1, Gregories Court, Gregories Road, Beaconsfield, Buckinghamshire, HP9 1HQ
UNITED KINGDOM Tel: +44-(0)1494-681515 Fax: +44(0)-1494-680452
HOMEPAGE
http://www.onkyo.com/
ONKYO CHINA LIMITED
Unit 1&12, 9/F, Ever Gain PlazaTower 1, 88, Container Port Road, Kwai Chung,
N.T., HONG KONG Tel: 852-2429-3118 Fax: 852-2428-9039
http://www.ch.onkyo.com/
I0802-2
SN 29344463A
(C) Copyright 2007 ONKYO CORPORATION Japan. All rights reserved.
* 2 9 3 4 4 4 6 3 A *
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|
Milwaukee Caulking Gun 2441 20 User Manual
NEC Computer Monitor EX231WP BK User Manual
Niles Audio Stereo Amplifier SI 2100 User Manual
Nilfisk ALTO Speaker Elvis Series User Manual
Omega Engineering Stud Sensor FLR1000 User Manual
Optoma Technology Projector EP550 User Manual
Panasonic Power Supply KW4S User Manual
Panasonic Switch AW SW350E User Manual
Panasonic Switch MA24D54 User Manual
Patton electronic Model Vehicle 1030 User Manual